Add a gas configure option to select the default behaviour for the generation of...
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
239 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
240 [@b{--statistics}]
241 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
242 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
243 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
244 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
245 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
246 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
247 @c
248 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
249 @c Add an empty line for separation.
250 @ifset AARCH64
251
252 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
253 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
254 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
255 @end ifset
256 @ifset ALPHA
257
258 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
259 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
260 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
261 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
262 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
263 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
264 @end ifset
265 @ifset ARC
266
267 @emph{Target ARC options:}
268 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
269 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
270 [@b{-mcode-density}]
271 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
272 @end ifset
273 @ifset ARM
274
275 @emph{Target ARM options:}
276 @c Don't document the deprecated options
277 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
278 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
279 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
280 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
281 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
282 [@b{-mthumb}]
283 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
284 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
285 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
286 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
287 @end ifset
288 @ifset Blackfin
289
290 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
291 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
292 [@b{-mfdpic}]
293 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
294 [@b{-mnopic}]
295 @end ifset
296 @ifset CRIS
297
298 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
299 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
300 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
301 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
302 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
303 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
304 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D10V
307
308 @emph{Target D10V options:}
309 [@b{-O}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D30V
312
313 @emph{Target D30V options:}
314 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset EPIPHANY
317
318 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
319 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset H8
322
323 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
324 [-h-tick-hex]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset HPPA
327 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset I80386
330
331 @emph{Target i386 options:}
332 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
333 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
334 @end ifset
335 @ifset I960
336
337 @emph{Target i960 options:}
338 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
339 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
340 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
341 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
342 @end ifset
343 @ifset IA64
344
345 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
346 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
347 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
348 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
349 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
350 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
351 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
352 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset IP2K
355
356 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
357 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32C
360
361 @emph{Target M32C options:}
362 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32R
365
366 @emph{Target M32R options:}
367 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
368 @b{--W[n]p}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M680X0
371
372 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
373 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M68HC11
376
377 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
378 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
379 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
380 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
381 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
382 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
383 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
384 @end ifset
385 @ifset MCORE
386
387 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
388 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
389 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset METAG
392
393 @emph{Target Meta options:}
394 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset MICROBLAZE
397 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
398 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
399 @end ifset
400 @ifset MIPS
401
402 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
403 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
404 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
405 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
406 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
407 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
408 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
409 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
410 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
411 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
412 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
413 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
414 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
415 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
416 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
417 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
418 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
419 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
420 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
421 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
422 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
423 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
424 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
425 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
426 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
427 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
428 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
429 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
430 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
431 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
432 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
433 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
434 @end ifset
435 @ifset MMIX
436
437 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
438 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
439 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
440 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
441 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
442 @end ifset
443 @ifset NIOSII
444
445 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
446 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
447 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
448 @end ifset
449 @ifset NDS32
450
451 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
452 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
453 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
454 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
455 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
456 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
457 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
458 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
459 [@b{-mb2bb}]
460 @end ifset
461 @ifset PDP11
462
463 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
464 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
465 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
466 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PJ
469
470 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
471 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
472 @end ifset
473 @ifset PPC
474
475 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
476 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
477 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
478 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
479 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
480 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
481 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
482 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
483 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
484 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
485 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
486 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
487 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
488 @end ifset
489 @ifset RL78
490
491 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
492 [@b{-mg10}]
493 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
494 @end ifset
495 @ifset RX
496
497 @emph{Target RX options:}
498 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
499 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
500 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
501 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
502 [@b{-mpid}]
503 [@b{-mrelax}]
504 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
505 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
506 @end ifset
507 @ifset S390
508
509 @emph{Target s390 options:}
510 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
511 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
512 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
513 @end ifset
514 @ifset SCORE
515
516 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
517 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
518 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
519 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
520 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
521 @end ifset
522 @ifset SPARC
523
524 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
525 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
526 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
527 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
528 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
529 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
530 @end ifset
531 @ifset TIC54X
532
533 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
534 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
535 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
536 @end ifset
537 @ifset TIC6X
538
539 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
540 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
541 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
542 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
543 @end ifset
544 @ifset TILEGX
545
546 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
547 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
548 @end ifset
549 @ifset TILEPRO
550 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
551 @end ifset
552 @ifset VISIUM
553
554 @emph{Target Visium options:}
555 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
556 @end ifset
557 @ifset XTENSA
558
559 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
560 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
561 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
562 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
563 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
564 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
565 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
566 @end ifset
567 @ifset Z80
568
569 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
570 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
571 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
572 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
573 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
574 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
575 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
576 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
577 @end ifset
578 @ifset Z8000
579
580 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
581 @end ifset
582
583 @c man end
584 @end smallexample
585
586 @c man begin OPTIONS
587
588 @table @gcctabopt
589 @include at-file.texi
590
591 @item -a[cdghlmns]
592 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
593
594 @table @gcctabopt
595 @item -ac
596 omit false conditionals
597
598 @item -ad
599 omit debugging directives
600
601 @item -ag
602 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
603
604 @item -ah
605 include high-level source
606
607 @item -al
608 include assembly
609
610 @item -am
611 include macro expansions
612
613 @item -an
614 omit forms processing
615
616 @item -as
617 include symbols
618
619 @item =file
620 set the name of the listing file
621 @end table
622
623 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
624 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
625 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
626
627 @item --alternate
628 Begin in alternate macro mode.
629 @ifclear man
630 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
631 @end ifclear
632
633 @item --compress-debug-sections
634 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
635 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
636 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
637 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
638
639 @ifset ELF
640 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
641 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
642 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
643 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
644 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
645 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
646 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
647 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
648 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
649 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
650 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
651 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
652 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
653 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
654 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
655
656 @end ifset
657
658 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
659 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
660 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
661 override this.
662
663 @item -D
664 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
665 other assemblers.
666
667 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
668 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
669 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
670
671 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
672 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
673 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
674 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
675 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
676 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
677
678 @item -f
679 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
680 compiler output).
681
682 @item -g
683 @itemx --gen-debug
684 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
685 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
686 ECOFF or DWARF2.
687
688 @item --gstabs
689 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
690 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
691
692 @item --gstabs+
693 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
694 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
695 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
696 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
697 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
698
699 @item --gdwarf-2
700 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
701 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
702 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
703
704 @item --gdwarf-sections
705 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
706 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
707 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
708 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
709 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
710 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
711 suffix.
712
713 @item --size-check=error
714 @itemx --size-check=warning
715 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
716
717 @item --help
718 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
719
720 @item --target-help
721 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
722
723 @item -I @var{dir}
724 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
725
726 @item -J
727 Don't warn about signed overflow.
728
729 @item -K
730 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
731 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
732 @end ifclear
733 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
734 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
735 @end ifset
736
737 @item -L
738 @itemx --keep-locals
739 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
740 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
741 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
742 @ifclear man
743 @xref{Symbol Names}.
744 @end ifclear
745
746 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
747 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
748 listing to @var{number}.
749
750 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
751 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
752 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
753
754 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
755 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
756 @var{number} bytes.
757
758 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
759 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
760 to @var{number} + 1.
761
762 @item -o @var{objfile}
763 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
764
765 @item -R
766 Fold the data section into the text section.
767
768 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
769 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
770 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
771 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
772 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
773 requirements at the expense of speed.
774
775 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
776 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
777 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
778 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
779
780 @ifset ELF
781 @item --sectname-subst
782 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
783 @ifclear man
784 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
785 @end ifclear
786 @end ifset
787
788 @item --statistics
789 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
790 assembly.
791
792 @item --strip-local-absolute
793 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
794
795 @item -v
796 @itemx -version
797 Print the @command{as} version.
798
799 @item --version
800 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
801
802 @item -W
803 @itemx --no-warn
804 Suppress warning messages.
805
806 @item --fatal-warnings
807 Treat warnings as errors.
808
809 @item --warn
810 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
811
812 @item -w
813 Ignored.
814
815 @item -x
816 Ignored.
817
818 @item -Z
819 Generate an object file even after errors.
820
821 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
822 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
823
824 @end table
825 @c man end
826
827 @ifset AARCH64
828
829 @ifclear man
830 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
831 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
832 @end ifclear
833
834 @ifset man
835 @c man begin OPTIONS
836 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
837 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
838 @c man end
839 @c man begin INCLUDE
840 @include c-aarch64.texi
841 @c ended inside the included file
842 @end ifset
843
844 @end ifset
845
846 @ifset ALPHA
847
848 @ifclear man
849 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
850 for an Alpha processor.
851 @end ifclear
852
853 @ifset man
854 @c man begin OPTIONS
855 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
856 processor.
857 @c man end
858 @c man begin INCLUDE
859 @include c-alpha.texi
860 @c ended inside the included file
861 @end ifset
862
863 @end ifset
864
865 @c man begin OPTIONS
866 @ifset ARC
867 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
868 processor.
869
870 @table @gcctabopt
871 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
872 This option selects the core processor variant.
873 @item -EB | -EL
874 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
875 @item -mcode-density
876 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
877 @end table
878 @end ifset
879
880 @ifset ARM
881 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
882 processor family.
883
884 @table @gcctabopt
885 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
886 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
887 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
888 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
889 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
890 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
891 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
892 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
893 @item -mthumb
894 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
895 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
896 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
897 @item -EB | -EL
898 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
899 @item -mthumb-interwork
900 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
901 ARM code in mind.
902 @item -mccs
903 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
904 @item -k
905 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
906 @end table
907 @end ifset
908 @c man end
909
910 @ifset Blackfin
911
912 @ifclear man
913 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
914 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
915 @end ifclear
916
917 @ifset man
918 @c man begin OPTIONS
919 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
920 the Blackfin processor family.
921 @c man end
922 @c man begin INCLUDE
923 @include c-bfin.texi
924 @c ended inside the included file
925 @end ifset
926
927 @end ifset
928
929 @c man begin OPTIONS
930 @ifset CRIS
931 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
932 @end ifset
933
934 @ifset D10V
935 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
936 a D10V processor.
937 @table @gcctabopt
938 @cindex D10V optimization
939 @cindex optimization, D10V
940 @item -O
941 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
942 @end table
943 @end ifset
944
945 @ifset D30V
946 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
947 processor.
948 @table @gcctabopt
949 @cindex D30V optimization
950 @cindex optimization, D30V
951 @item -O
952 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
953
954 @cindex D30V nops
955 @item -n
956 Warn when nops are generated.
957
958 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
959 @item -N
960 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
961 @end table
962 @end ifset
963 @c man end
964
965 @ifset EPIPHANY
966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
967 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
968
969 @ifclear man
970 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
971 configured for an Epiphany processor.
972 @end ifclear
973
974 @ifset man
975 @c man begin OPTIONS
976 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
977 an Epiphany processor.
978 @c man end
979 @c man begin INCLUDE
980 @include c-epiphany.texi
981 @c ended inside the included file
982 @end ifset
983
984 @end ifset
985
986 @ifset H8300
987
988 @ifclear man
989 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
990 for an H8/300 processor.
991 @end ifclear
992
993 @ifset man
994 @c man begin OPTIONS
995 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
996 processor.
997 @c man end
998 @c man begin INCLUDE
999 @include c-h8300.texi
1000 @c ended inside the included file
1001 @end ifset
1002
1003 @end ifset
1004
1005 @ifset I80386
1006
1007 @ifclear man
1008 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1009 configured for an i386 processor.
1010 @end ifclear
1011
1012 @ifset man
1013 @c man begin OPTIONS
1014 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1015 an i386 processor.
1016 @c man end
1017 @c man begin INCLUDE
1018 @include c-i386.texi
1019 @c ended inside the included file
1020 @end ifset
1021
1022 @end ifset
1023
1024 @c man begin OPTIONS
1025 @ifset I960
1026 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1027 Intel 80960 processor.
1028
1029 @table @gcctabopt
1030 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1031 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1032
1033 @item -b
1034 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1035
1036 @item -no-relax
1037 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1038 error if necessary.
1039
1040 @end table
1041 @end ifset
1042
1043 @ifset IP2K
1044 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1045 Ubicom IP2K series.
1046
1047 @table @gcctabopt
1048
1049 @item -mip2022ext
1050 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1051
1052 @item -mip2022
1053 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1054 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1055
1056 @end table
1057 @end ifset
1058
1059 @ifset M32C
1060 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1061 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1062
1063 @table @gcctabopt
1064
1065 @item -m32c
1066 Assemble M32C instructions.
1067
1068 @item -m16c
1069 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1070
1071 @item -relax
1072 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1073
1074 @item -h-tick-hex
1075 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1076
1077 @end table
1078 @end ifset
1079
1080 @ifset M32R
1081 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1082 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1083
1084 @table @gcctabopt
1085
1086 @item --m32rx
1087 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1088 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1089
1090 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1091 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1092 encountered.
1093
1094 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1095 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1096 encountered.
1097
1098 @end table
1099 @end ifset
1100
1101 @ifset M680X0
1102 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1103 Motorola 68000 series.
1104
1105 @table @gcctabopt
1106
1107 @item -l
1108 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1109
1110 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1111 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1112 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1113 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1114 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1115
1116 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1117 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1118 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1119 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1120 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1121 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1122
1123 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1124 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1125 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1126
1127 @end table
1128 @end ifset
1129
1130 @ifset NIOSII
1131
1132 @ifclear man
1133 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1134 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1135 @end ifclear
1136
1137 @ifset man
1138 @c man begin OPTIONS
1139 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1140 Altera Nios II processor.
1141 @c man end
1142 @c man begin INCLUDE
1143 @include c-nios2.texi
1144 @c ended inside the included file
1145 @end ifset
1146 @end ifset
1147
1148 @ifset PDP11
1149
1150 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1151 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1152
1153 @table @gcctabopt
1154 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1155 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1156 default is @option{-mpic}.
1157
1158 @item -mall
1159 @itemx -mall-extensions
1160 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1161
1162 @item -mno-extensions
1163 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1164
1165 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1166 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1167
1168 @item -m@var{cpu}
1169 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1170 disable all other extensions.
1171
1172 @item -m@var{machine}
1173 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1174 model, and disable all other extensions.
1175 @end table
1176
1177 @end ifset
1178
1179 @ifset PJ
1180 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1181 a picoJava processor.
1182
1183 @table @gcctabopt
1184
1185 @cindex PJ endianness
1186 @cindex endianness, PJ
1187 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1188 @item -mb
1189 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1190
1191 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1192 @item -ml
1193 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1194
1195 @end table
1196 @end ifset
1197
1198 @ifset M68HC11
1199 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1200 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1201
1202 @table @gcctabopt
1203
1204 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1205 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1206 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1207
1208 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1209 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1210 XGATE address space.
1211
1212 @item -mshort
1213 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1214
1215 @item -mlong
1216 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1217
1218 @item -mshort-double
1219 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1220
1221 @item -mlong-double
1222 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1223
1224 @item --force-long-branches
1225 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1226 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1227 sub routine.
1228
1229 @item -S | --short-branches
1230 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1231 when the offset is out of range.
1232
1233 @item --strict-direct-mode
1234 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1235 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1236
1237 @item --print-insn-syntax
1238 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1239
1240 @item --print-opcodes
1241 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1242
1243 @item --generate-example
1244 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1245 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1246
1247 @end table
1248 @end ifset
1249
1250 @ifset SPARC
1251 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1252 for the SPARC architecture:
1253
1254 @table @gcctabopt
1255 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1256 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1257 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1258
1259 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1260 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1261
1262 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1263 UltraSPARC extensions.
1264
1265 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1266 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1267 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1268
1269 @item -bump
1270 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1271 @end table
1272 @end ifset
1273
1274 @ifset TIC54X
1275 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1276 architecture.
1277
1278 @table @gcctabopt
1279 @item -mfar-mode
1280 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1281 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1282 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1283 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1284 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1285 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1286 behaviour in the shell.
1287 @end table
1288 @end ifset
1289
1290 @ifset MIPS
1291 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1292 a MIPS processor.
1293
1294 @table @gcctabopt
1295 @item -G @var{num}
1296 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1297 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1298 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1299
1300 @cindex MIPS endianness
1301 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1302 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1303 @item -EB
1304 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1305
1306 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1307 @item -EL
1308 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1309
1310 @cindex MIPS ISA
1311 @item -mips1
1312 @itemx -mips2
1313 @itemx -mips3
1314 @itemx -mips4
1315 @itemx -mips5
1316 @itemx -mips32
1317 @itemx -mips32r2
1318 @itemx -mips32r3
1319 @itemx -mips32r5
1320 @itemx -mips32r6
1321 @itemx -mips64
1322 @itemx -mips64r2
1323 @itemx -mips64r3
1324 @itemx -mips64r5
1325 @itemx -mips64r6
1326 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1327 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1328 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1329 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1330 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1331 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1332 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1333 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1334 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1335 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1336
1337 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1338 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1339
1340 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1341 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1342
1343 @item -mfix7000
1344 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1345 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1346 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1347
1348 @item -mfix-rm7000
1349 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1350 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1351 followed by a load instruction.
1352
1353 @item -mdebug
1354 @itemx -no-mdebug
1355 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1356 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1357
1358 @item -mpdr
1359 @itemx -mno-pdr
1360 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1361
1362 @item -mgp32
1363 @itemx -mfp32
1364 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1365 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1366 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1367 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1368
1369 @item -mgp64
1370 @itemx -mfp64
1371 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1372 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1373 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1374 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1375
1376 @item -mfpxx
1377 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1378 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1379 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1380 32 or 64 bits wide.
1381
1382 @item -modd-spreg
1383 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1384 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1385 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1386 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1387
1388 @item -mips16
1389 @itemx -no-mips16
1390 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1391 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1392 turns off this option.
1393
1394 @item -mmicromips
1395 @itemx -mno-micromips
1396 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1397 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1398 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1399 at the start of the assembly file.
1400
1401 @item -msmartmips
1402 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1403 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1404 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1405 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1406
1407 @item -mips3d
1408 @itemx -no-mips3d
1409 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1410 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1411 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1412
1413 @item -mdmx
1414 @itemx -no-mdmx
1415 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1416 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1417 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1418
1419 @item -mdsp
1420 @itemx -mno-dsp
1421 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1422 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1423 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1424
1425 @item -mdspr2
1426 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1427 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1428 This option implies -mdsp.
1429 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1430 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1431
1432 @item -mmsa
1433 @itemx -mno-msa
1434 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1435 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1436 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1437
1438 @item -mxpa
1439 @itemx -mno-xpa
1440 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1441 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1442 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1443
1444 @item -mmt
1445 @itemx -mno-mt
1446 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1447 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1448 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1449
1450 @item -mmcu
1451 @itemx -mno-mcu
1452 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1453 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1454 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1455
1456 @item -minsn32
1457 @itemx -mno-insn32
1458 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1459 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1460 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1461 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1462 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1463 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1464 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1465
1466 @item --construct-floats
1467 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1468 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1469 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1470 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1471 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1472 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1473
1474 @item --relax-branch
1475 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1476 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1477 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1478 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1479
1480 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1481 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1482 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1483
1484 @cindex emulation
1485 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1486 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1487 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1488 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1489 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1490
1491 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1492 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1493 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1494 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1495 preferred options instead.
1496
1497 @item -nocpp
1498 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1499 the native tools.
1500
1501 @item --trap
1502 @itemx --no-trap
1503 @itemx --break
1504 @itemx --no-break
1505 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1506 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1507 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1508 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1509 break exception.
1510
1511 @item -n
1512 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1513 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1514 @end table
1515 @end ifset
1516
1517 @ifset MCORE
1518 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1519 an MCore processor.
1520
1521 @table @gcctabopt
1522 @item -jsri2bsr
1523 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1524 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1525 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1526
1527 @item -sifilter
1528 @itemx -nosifilter
1529 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1530 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1531
1532 @item -relax
1533 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1534
1535 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1536 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1537 can be assembled.
1538
1539 @item -EB
1540 Assemble for a big endian target.
1541
1542 @item -EL
1543 Assemble for a little endian target.
1544
1545 @end table
1546 @end ifset
1547 @c man end
1548
1549 @ifset METAG
1550
1551 @ifclear man
1552 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1553 for a Meta processor.
1554 @end ifclear
1555
1556 @ifset man
1557 @c man begin OPTIONS
1558 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1559 Meta processor.
1560 @c man end
1561 @c man begin INCLUDE
1562 @include c-metag.texi
1563 @c ended inside the included file
1564 @end ifset
1565
1566 @end ifset
1567
1568 @c man begin OPTIONS
1569 @ifset MMIX
1570 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1571 @end ifset
1572
1573 @ifset NDS32
1574
1575 @ifclear man
1576 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1577 for a NDS32 processor.
1578 @end ifclear
1579 @c ended inside the included file
1580 @end ifset
1581
1582 @ifset man
1583 @c man begin OPTIONS
1584 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1585 NDS32 processor.
1586 @c man end
1587 @c man begin INCLUDE
1588 @include c-nds32.texi
1589 @c ended inside the included file
1590 @end ifset
1591
1592 @c man end
1593 @ifset PPC
1594
1595 @ifclear man
1596 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1597 for a PowerPC processor.
1598 @end ifclear
1599
1600 @ifset man
1601 @c man begin OPTIONS
1602 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1603 PowerPC processor.
1604 @c man end
1605 @c man begin INCLUDE
1606 @include c-ppc.texi
1607 @c ended inside the included file
1608 @end ifset
1609
1610 @end ifset
1611
1612 @c man begin OPTIONS
1613 @ifset RX
1614 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1615 @end ifset
1616
1617 @ifset S390
1618 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1619 processor family.
1620
1621 @table @gcctabopt
1622 @item -m31
1623 @itemx -m64
1624 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1625 @item -mesa
1626 @item -mzarch
1627 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1628 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1629 @item -march=@var{processor}
1630 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1631 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1632 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1633 @item -mregnames
1634 @itemx -mno-regnames
1635 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1636 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1637 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1638 but evaluates to zero.
1639 @end table
1640 @end ifset
1641 @c man end
1642
1643 @ifset TIC6X
1644
1645 @ifclear man
1646 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1647 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1648 @end ifclear
1649
1650 @ifset man
1651 @c man begin OPTIONS
1652 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1653 TMS320C6000 processor.
1654 @c man end
1655 @c man begin INCLUDE
1656 @include c-tic6x.texi
1657 @c ended inside the included file
1658 @end ifset
1659
1660 @end ifset
1661
1662 @ifset TILEGX
1663
1664 @ifclear man
1665 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1666 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1667 @end ifclear
1668
1669 @ifset man
1670 @c man begin OPTIONS
1671 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1672 processor.
1673 @c man end
1674 @c man begin INCLUDE
1675 @include c-tilegx.texi
1676 @c ended inside the included file
1677 @end ifset
1678
1679 @end ifset
1680
1681 @ifset VISIUM
1682
1683 @ifclear man
1684 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1685 for a Visium processor.
1686 @end ifclear
1687
1688 @ifset man
1689 @c man begin OPTIONS
1690 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1691 processor.
1692 @c man end
1693 @c man begin INCLUDE
1694 @include c-visium.texi
1695 @c ended inside the included file
1696 @end ifset
1697
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 @ifset XTENSA
1701
1702 @ifclear man
1703 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1704 for an Xtensa processor.
1705 @end ifclear
1706
1707 @ifset man
1708 @c man begin OPTIONS
1709 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1710 Xtensa processor.
1711 @c man end
1712 @c man begin INCLUDE
1713 @include c-xtensa.texi
1714 @c ended inside the included file
1715 @end ifset
1716
1717 @end ifset
1718
1719 @c man begin OPTIONS
1720
1721 @ifset Z80
1722 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1723 a Z80 family processor.
1724 @table @gcctabopt
1725 @item -z80
1726 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1727 @item -r800
1728 Assemble for R800 processor.
1729 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1730 @itemx -Wnud
1731 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1732 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1733 @itemx -Wnup
1734 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1735 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1736 @itemx -Wud
1737 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1738 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1739 @itemx -Wup
1740 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1741 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1742 @itemx -Fud
1743 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1744 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1745 @itemx -Fup
1746 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1747 @end table
1748 @end ifset
1749
1750 @c man end
1751
1752 @menu
1753 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1754 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1755 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1756 * Command Line:: Command Line
1757 * Input Files:: Input Files
1758 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1759 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1760 @end menu
1761
1762 @node Manual
1763 @section Structure of this Manual
1764
1765 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1766 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1767 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1768 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1769 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1770
1771 @ifclear GENERIC
1772 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1773 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1774 @end ifclear
1775 @ifset GENERIC
1776 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1777 various flavors of the assembler.
1778 @end ifset
1779
1780 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1781 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1782 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1783 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1784 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1785 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1786 particular architecture.
1787 @ifset GENERIC
1788 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1789 machine architecture manual for this information.
1790 @end ifset
1791 @ifclear GENERIC
1792 @ifset H8/300
1793 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1794 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1795 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1796 @end ifset
1797 @ifset SH
1798 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1799 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1800 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1801 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1802 @end ifset
1803 @ifset Z8000
1804 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1805 @end ifset
1806 @end ifclear
1807
1808 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1809 @ignore
1810 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1811 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1812 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1813 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1814 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1815 qualification.
1816
1817 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1818 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1819 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1820 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1821 @end ignore
1822
1823 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1824 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1825 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1826 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1827 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1828 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1829 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1830 @c directives).
1831
1832 @node GNU Assembler
1833 @section The GNU Assembler
1834
1835 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1836
1837 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1838 @ifclear GENERIC
1839 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1840 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1841 @end ifclear
1842 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1843 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1844 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1845 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1846 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1847
1848 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1849 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1850 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1851 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1852 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1853 machine would assemble.
1854 @ifset VAX
1855 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1856 @end ifset
1857 @ifset M680X0
1858 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1859 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1860 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1861 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1862 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1863 @end ifset
1864
1865 @c man end
1866
1867 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1868 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1869 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1870
1871 @node Object Formats
1872 @section Object File Formats
1873
1874 @cindex object file format
1875 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1876 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1877 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1878 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1879 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1880 @ifclear GENERIC
1881 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1882 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1883 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1884 @end ifclear
1885 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1886 @ifset I960
1887 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1888 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1889 @end ifset
1890 @ifset HPPA
1891 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1892 SOM or ELF format object files.
1893 @end ifset
1894 @end ifclear
1895
1896 @node Command Line
1897 @section Command Line
1898
1899 @cindex command line conventions
1900
1901 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1902 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1903 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1904 significant.
1905
1906 @cindex standard input, as input file
1907 @kindex --
1908 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1909 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1910
1911 @cindex options, command line
1912 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1913 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1914 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1915 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1916 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1917
1918 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1919 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1920 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1921 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1922
1923 @smallexample
1924 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1925 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1926 @end smallexample
1927
1928 @node Input Files
1929 @section Input Files
1930
1931 @cindex input
1932 @cindex source program
1933 @cindex files, input
1934 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1935 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1936 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1937 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1938
1939 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1940 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1941 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1942 order specified.
1943
1944 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1945 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1946 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1947 (The standard input is also a file.)
1948
1949 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1950 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1951 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1952 is taken to be an input file name.
1953
1954 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1955 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1956 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1957 to assemble.
1958
1959 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1960 in your command line.
1961
1962 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1963 file.
1964
1965 @c man end
1966
1967 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1968
1969 @cindex input file linenumbers
1970 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1971 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1972 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1973 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1974 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1975
1976 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1977 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1978
1979 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1980 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1981 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1982 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1983 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1984 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1985
1986 @node Object
1987 @section Output (Object) File
1988
1989 @cindex object file
1990 @cindex output file
1991 @kindex a.out
1992 @kindex .o
1993 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1994 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1995 is the object file. Its default name is
1996 @ifclear BOUT
1997 @code{a.out}.
1998 @end ifclear
1999 @ifset BOUT
2000 @ifset GENERIC
2001 @code{a.out}, or
2002 @end ifset
2003 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2004 @end ifset
2005 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2006 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2007 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2008 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2009 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2010
2011 @cindex linker
2012 @kindex ld
2013 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2014 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2015 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2016 information for the debugger.
2017
2018 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2019 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2020
2021 @node Errors
2022 @section Error and Warning Messages
2023
2024 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2025
2026 @cindex error messages
2027 @cindex warning messages
2028 @cindex messages from assembler
2029 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2030 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2031 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2032 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2033 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2034
2035 @c man end
2036
2037 @cindex format of warning messages
2038 Warning messages have the format
2039
2040 @smallexample
2041 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2042 @end smallexample
2043
2044 @noindent
2045 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2046 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2047 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2048 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2049 @ifset GENERIC
2050 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2051 @end ifset
2052 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2053 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2054 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2055 tradition).
2056
2057 @cindex format of error messages
2058 Error messages have the format
2059 @smallexample
2060 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2061 @end smallexample
2062 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2063 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2064 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2065
2066 @node Invoking
2067 @chapter Command-Line Options
2068
2069 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2070 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2071 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2072 for options specific
2073 @ifclear GENERIC
2074 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2075 @end ifclear
2076 @ifset GENERIC
2077 to particular machine architectures.
2078 @end ifset
2079
2080 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2081
2082 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2083 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2084 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2085 by commas. For example:
2086
2087 @smallexample
2088 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2089 @end smallexample
2090
2091 @noindent
2092 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2093 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2094 local symbols in the symbol table).
2095
2096 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2097 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2098 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2099 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2100 assembler.)
2101
2102 @c man end
2103
2104 @menu
2105 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2106 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2107 * D:: -D for compatibility
2108 * f:: -f to work faster
2109 * I:: -I for .include search path
2110 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2111 * K:: -K for compatibility
2112 @end ifclear
2113 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2114 * K:: -K for difference tables
2115 @end ifset
2116
2117 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2118 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2119 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2120 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2121 * o:: -o to name the object file
2122 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2123 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2124 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2125 * v:: -v to announce version
2126 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2127 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2128 @end menu
2129
2130 @node a
2131 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2132
2133 @kindex -a
2134 @kindex -ac
2135 @kindex -ad
2136 @kindex -ag
2137 @kindex -ah
2138 @kindex -al
2139 @kindex -an
2140 @kindex -as
2141 @cindex listings, enabling
2142 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2143
2144 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2145 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2146 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2147 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2148 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2149 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2150 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2151 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2152 also.
2153
2154 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2155 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2156
2157 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2158 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2159 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2160 omitted from the listing.
2161
2162 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2163 listing.
2164
2165 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2166 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2167 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2168 @code{.sbttl}.
2169 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2170 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2171 listing-control directives have no effect.
2172
2173 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2174 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2175
2176 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2177 because it
2178 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2179 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2180 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2181 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2182 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2183
2184 @node alternate
2185 @section @option{--alternate}
2186
2187 @kindex --alternate
2188 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2189
2190 @node D
2191 @section @option{-D}
2192
2193 @kindex -D
2194 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2195 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2196 @command{@value{AS}}.
2197
2198 @node f
2199 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2200
2201 @kindex -f
2202 @cindex trusted compiler
2203 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2204 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2205 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2206 and comment preprocessing on
2207 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2208 ,Preprocessing}.
2209
2210 @quotation
2211 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2212 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2213 not work correctly.
2214 @end quotation
2215
2216 @node I
2217 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2218
2219 @kindex -I @var{path}
2220 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2221 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2222 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2223 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2224 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2225 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2226 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2227 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2228 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2229 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2230
2231 @node K
2232 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2233
2234 @kindex -K
2235 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2236 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2237 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2238 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2239 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2240 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2241 alteration on other platforms.
2242 @end ifclear
2243
2244 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2245 @cindex difference tables, warning
2246 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2247 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2248 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2249 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2250 is done.
2251 @end ifset
2252
2253 @node L
2254 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2255
2256 @kindex -L
2257 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2258 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2259 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2260 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2261 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2262 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2263 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2264 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2265
2266 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2267 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2268 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2269
2270 @node listing
2271 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2272
2273 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2274 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2275 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2276 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2277 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2278 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2279 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2280 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2281
2282 @table @gcctabopt
2283 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2284 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2285 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2286 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2287 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2288
2289 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2290 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2291 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2292 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2293 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2294 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2295 switch is used the default is to one.
2296
2297 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2298 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2299 @cindex Width of source line output
2300 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2301 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2302 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2303
2304 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2305 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2306 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2307 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2308 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2309 @end table
2310
2311 @node M
2312 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2313
2314 @kindex -M
2315 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2316 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2317 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2318 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2319 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2320 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2321 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2322 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2323 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2324
2325 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2326 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2327 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2328 individually. These are:
2329
2330 @itemize @bullet
2331 @item global symbols in common section
2332
2333 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2334 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2335 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2336 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2337 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2338
2339 @item complex relocations
2340
2341 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2342 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2343 are not support by other object file formats.
2344
2345 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2346
2347 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2348 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2349 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2350 script.
2351
2352 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2353
2354 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2355 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2356
2357 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2358
2359 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2360 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2361 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2362 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2363 assigned within a linker script.
2364 @end itemize
2365
2366 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2367 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2368 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2369
2370 @itemize @bullet
2371
2372 @item EBCDIC strings
2373
2374 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2375
2376 @item packed binary coded decimal
2377
2378 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2379 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2380
2381 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2382
2383 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2384
2385 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2386
2387 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2388
2389 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2390
2391 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2392 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2393 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2394 these options serve no purpose.
2395
2396 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2397
2398 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2399 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2400 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2401
2402 @item other @code{OPT} options
2403
2404 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2405 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2406
2407 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2408
2409 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2410 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2411
2412 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2413
2414 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2415
2416 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2417
2418 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2419
2420 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2421
2422 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2423
2424 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2425
2426 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2427
2428 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2429
2430 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2431
2432 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2433
2434 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2435
2436 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2437
2438 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2439
2440 @end itemize
2441
2442 @node MD
2443 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2444
2445 @kindex --MD
2446 @cindex dependency tracking
2447 @cindex make rules
2448
2449 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2450 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2451 dependencies of the main source file.
2452
2453 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2454
2455 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2456
2457 @node o
2458 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2459
2460 @kindex -o
2461 @cindex naming object file
2462 @cindex object file name
2463 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2464 default it has the name
2465 @ifset GENERIC
2466 @ifset I960
2467 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2468 @end ifset
2469 @ifclear I960
2470 @file{a.out}.
2471 @end ifclear
2472 @end ifset
2473 @ifclear GENERIC
2474 @ifset I960
2475 @file{b.out}.
2476 @end ifset
2477 @ifclear I960
2478 @file{a.out}.
2479 @end ifclear
2480 @end ifclear
2481 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2482 object file a different name.
2483
2484 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2485 existing file of the same name.
2486
2487 @node R
2488 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2489
2490 @kindex -R
2491 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2492 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2493 @cindex joining text and data sections
2494 @cindex merging text and data sections
2495 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2496 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2497 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2498 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2499 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2500 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2501
2502 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2503 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2504 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2505 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2506
2507 @ifset COFF-ELF
2508 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2509 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2510 @samp{.data}.
2511 @end ifset
2512
2513 @ifset HPPA
2514 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2515 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2516 @end ifset
2517
2518 @node statistics
2519 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2520
2521 @kindex --statistics
2522 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2523 @cindex time, total for assembly
2524 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2525 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2526 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2527 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2528 seconds).
2529
2530 @node traditional-format
2531 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2532
2533 @kindex --traditional-format
2534 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2535 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2536 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2537
2538 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2539 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2540
2541 @node v
2542 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2543
2544 @kindex -v
2545 @kindex -version
2546 @cindex assembler version
2547 @cindex version of assembler
2548 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2549 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2550 command line.
2551
2552 @node W
2553 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2554
2555 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2556 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2557 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2558 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2559
2560 @kindex -W
2561 @kindex --no-warn
2562 @cindex suppressing warnings
2563 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2564 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2565 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2566 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2567 are still reported.
2568
2569 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2570 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2571 @cindex warnings, causing error
2572 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2573 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2574
2575 @kindex --warn
2576 @cindex warnings, switching on
2577 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2578 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2579
2580 @node Z
2581 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2582 @cindex object file, after errors
2583 @cindex errors, continuing after
2584 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2585 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2586 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2587 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2588 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2589 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2590
2591 @node Syntax
2592 @chapter Syntax
2593
2594 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2595 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2596 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2597 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2598 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2599 @ifclear VAX
2600 assembler.
2601 @end ifclear
2602 @ifset VAX
2603 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2604 @end ifset
2605
2606 @menu
2607 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2608 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2609 * Comments:: Comments
2610 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2611 * Statements:: Statements
2612 * Constants:: Constants
2613 @end menu
2614
2615 @node Preprocessing
2616 @section Preprocessing
2617
2618 @cindex preprocessing
2619 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2620 @itemize @bullet
2621 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2622 @item
2623 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2624 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2625 a single space.
2626
2627 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2628 @item
2629 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2630 appropriate number of newlines.
2631
2632 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2633 @item
2634 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2635 @end itemize
2636
2637 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2638 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2639 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2640 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2641 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2642 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2643 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2644
2645 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2646 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2647 preprocessed.
2648
2649 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2650 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2651 @kindex #NO_APP
2652 @kindex #APP
2653 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2654 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2655 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2656 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2657 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2658 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2659 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2660 and whitespace.
2661
2662 @node Whitespace
2663 @section Whitespace
2664
2665 @cindex whitespace
2666 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2667 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2668 people to read. Unless within character constants
2669 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2670 as exactly one space.
2671
2672 @node Comments
2673 @section Comments
2674
2675 @cindex comments
2676 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2677 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2678
2679 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2680 This means you may not nest these comments.
2681
2682 @smallexample
2683 /*
2684 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2685 is to use this sort of comment.
2686 */
2687
2688 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2689 @end smallexample
2690
2691 @cindex line comment character
2692 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2693 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2694 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2695 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2696 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2697 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2698 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2699 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2700
2701 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2702 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2703 to specify logical line numbers:
2704
2705 @kindex #
2706 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2707 @cindex logical line numbers
2708 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2709 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2710 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2711 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2712 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2713
2714 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2715 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2716
2717 @smallexample
2718 # This is an ordinary comment.
2719 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2720 # This is logical line # 36.
2721 @end smallexample
2722 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2723 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2724
2725 @node Symbol Intro
2726 @section Symbols
2727
2728 @cindex characters used in symbols
2729 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2730 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2731 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2732 @samp{_.$}.
2733 @end ifclear
2734 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2735 @ifclear GENERIC
2736 @ifset H8
2737 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2738 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2739 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2740 symbol names.)
2741 @end ifset
2742 @end ifclear
2743 @end ifset
2744 @ifset GENERIC
2745 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2746 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2747 @end ifset
2748 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2749 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2750 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2751 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2752 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2753
2754 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2755 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2756 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2757 backslash @code{\} character.
2758 @cindex length of symbols
2759
2760 @node Statements
2761 @section Statements
2762
2763 @cindex statements, structure of
2764 @cindex line separator character
2765 @cindex statement separator character
2766
2767 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2768 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2769 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2770 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2771 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2772 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2773 exception: they do not end statements.
2774
2775 @cindex newline, required at file end
2776 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2777 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2778 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2779
2780 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2781
2782 @cindex instructions and directives
2783 @cindex directives and instructions
2784 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2785 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2786 @c 13feb91.
2787 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2788 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2789 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2790 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2791 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2792 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2793 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2794 @ifset GENERIC
2795 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2796 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2797 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2798 language.@refill
2799 @end ifset
2800
2801 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2802 @cindex label (@code{:})
2803 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2804 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2805 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2806
2807 @ifset HPPA
2808 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2809 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2810 only one label may be defined on each line.
2811 @end ifset
2812
2813 @smallexample
2814 label: .directive followed by something
2815 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2816 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2817 @end smallexample
2818
2819 @node Constants
2820 @section Constants
2821
2822 @cindex constants
2823 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2824 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2825 @smallexample
2826 @group
2827 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2828 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2829 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2830 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2831 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2832 @end group
2833 @end smallexample
2834
2835 @menu
2836 * Characters:: Character Constants
2837 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2838 @end menu
2839
2840 @node Characters
2841 @subsection Character Constants
2842
2843 @cindex character constants
2844 @cindex constants, character
2845 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2846 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2847 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2848 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2849 used in arithmetic expressions.
2850
2851 @menu
2852 * Strings:: Strings
2853 * Chars:: Characters
2854 @end menu
2855
2856 @node Strings
2857 @subsubsection Strings
2858
2859 @cindex string constants
2860 @cindex constants, string
2861 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2862 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2863 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2864 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2865 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2866 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2867 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2868 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2869
2870 @cindex escape codes, character
2871 @cindex character escape codes
2872 @table @kbd
2873 @c @item \a
2874 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2875 @c
2876 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2877 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2878 @item \b
2879 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2880
2881 @c @item \e
2882 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2883 @c
2884 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2885 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2886 @item \f
2887 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2888
2889 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2890 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2891 @item \n
2892 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2893
2894 @c @item \p
2895 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2896 @c
2897 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2898 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2899 @item \r
2900 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2901
2902 @c @item \s
2903 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2904 @c other assemblers.
2905 @c
2906 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2907 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2908 @item \t
2909 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2910
2911 @c @item \v
2912 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2913 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2914 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2915 @c
2916 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2917 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2918 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2919 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2920 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2921 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2922
2923 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2924 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2925 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2926 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2927 lower case @code{x} works.
2928
2929 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2930 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2931 @item \\
2932 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2933
2934 @c @item \'
2935 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2936 @c This is needed in single character literals
2937 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2938 @c a @samp{'}.
2939 @c
2940 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2941 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2942 @item \"
2943 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2944 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2945
2946 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2947 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2948 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2949 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2950 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2951 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2952 code and warns you of the fact.
2953 @end table
2954
2955 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2956 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2957 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2958 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2959 sequence.
2960
2961 @node Chars
2962 @subsubsection Characters
2963
2964 @cindex single character constant
2965 @cindex character, single
2966 @cindex constant, single character
2967 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2968 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2969 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2970 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2971 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2972 grave accent. A newline
2973 @ifclear GENERIC
2974 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2975 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2976 @end ifclear
2977 @ifset abnormal-separator
2978 @ifset H8
2979 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2980 Renesas SH)
2981 @end ifset
2982 @end ifset
2983 @end ifclear
2984 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2985 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2986 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2987 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2988 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2989
2990 @node Numbers
2991 @subsection Number Constants
2992
2993 @cindex constants, number
2994 @cindex number constants
2995 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2996 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2997 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2998 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2999 are floating point numbers, described below.
3000
3001 @menu
3002 * Integers:: Integers
3003 * Bignums:: Bignums
3004 * Flonums:: Flonums
3005 @ifclear GENERIC
3006 @ifset I960
3007 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3008 @end ifset
3009 @end ifclear
3010 @end menu
3011
3012 @node Integers
3013 @subsubsection Integers
3014 @cindex integers
3015 @cindex constants, integer
3016
3017 @cindex binary integers
3018 @cindex integers, binary
3019 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3020 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3021
3022 @cindex octal integers
3023 @cindex integers, octal
3024 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3025 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3026
3027 @cindex decimal integers
3028 @cindex integers, decimal
3029 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3030 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3031
3032 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3033 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3034 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3035 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3036
3037 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3038 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3039 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3040
3041 @node Bignums
3042 @subsubsection Bignums
3043
3044 @cindex bignums
3045 @cindex constants, bignum
3046 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3047 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3048 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3049 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3050
3051 @node Flonums
3052 @subsubsection Flonums
3053 @cindex flonums
3054 @cindex floating point numbers
3055 @cindex constants, floating point
3056
3057 @cindex precision, floating point
3058 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3059 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3060 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3061 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3062 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3063 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3064
3065 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3066 @itemize @bullet
3067 @item
3068 The digit @samp{0}.
3069 @ifset HPPA
3070 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3071 @end ifset
3072
3073 @item
3074 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3075 @ifset GENERIC
3076 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3077 @ignore
3078 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3079 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3080 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3081 @end ignore
3082
3083 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3084 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3085 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3086
3087 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3088 (in upper or lower case).
3089
3090 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3091 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3092
3093 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3094 @end ifset
3095 @ifclear GENERIC
3096 @ifset ARC
3097 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3098 @end ifset
3099 @ifset H8
3100 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3101 @end ifset
3102 @ifset HPPA
3103 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3104 @end ifset
3105 @ifset I960
3106 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3107 @end ifset
3108 @end ifclear
3109
3110 @item
3111 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3112
3113 @item
3114 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3115
3116 @item
3117 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3118 or more decimal digits.
3119
3120 @item
3121 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3122
3123 @itemize @bullet
3124 @item
3125 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3126 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3127 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3128 @item
3129 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3130 @item
3131 One or more decimal digits.
3132 @end itemize
3133
3134 @end itemize
3135
3136 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3137 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3138
3139 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3140 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3141 @command{@value{AS}}.
3142
3143 @ifclear GENERIC
3144 @ifset I960
3145 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3146 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3147 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3148 @node Bit Fields
3149 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3150
3151 @cindex bit fields
3152 @cindex constants, bit field
3153 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3154 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3155 @example
3156 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3157 @end example
3158 @noindent
3159 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3160 @var{value}.
3161
3162 The resulting number is then packed
3163 @ifset GENERIC
3164 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3165 (in host-dependent byte order)
3166 @end ifset
3167 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3168 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3169 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3170 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3171 least significant digits.@refill
3172
3173 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3174 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3175 @end ifset
3176 @end ifclear
3177
3178 @node Sections
3179 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3180 @cindex sections
3181 @cindex relocation
3182
3183 @menu
3184 * Secs Background:: Background
3185 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3186 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3187 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3188 * bss:: bss Section
3189 @end menu
3190
3191 @node Secs Background
3192 @section Background
3193
3194 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3195 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3196 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3197
3198 @cindex linker, and assembler
3199 @cindex assembler, and linker
3200 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3201 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3202 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3203 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3204 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3205 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3206 sections.
3207
3208 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3209 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3210 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3211 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3212 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3213 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3214 the proper run-time addresses.
3215 @ifset H8
3216 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3217 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3218 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3219 @end ifset
3220
3221 @cindex standard assembler sections
3222 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3223 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3224 @dfn{bss} sections.
3225
3226 @ifset COFF-ELF
3227 @ifset GENERIC
3228 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3229 @end ifset
3230 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3231 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3232 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3233 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3234 @end ifset
3235
3236 @ifset HPPA
3237 @ifset GENERIC
3238 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3239 @end ifset
3240 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3241 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3242 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3243 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3244 assembler directives.
3245
3246 @ifset SOM
3247 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3248 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3249 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3250 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3251 @end ifset
3252 @end ifset
3253
3254 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3255 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3256
3257 @ifset HPPA
3258 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3259 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3260 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3261 @end ifset
3262
3263 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3264 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3265 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3266 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3267 file is mentioned:
3268 @itemize @bullet
3269 @item
3270 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3271 an address?
3272 @item
3273 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3274 @item
3275 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3276 @display
3277 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3278 @end display
3279 @item
3280 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3281 @end itemize
3282
3283 @cindex addresses, format of
3284 @cindex section-relative addressing
3285 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3286 @display
3287 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3288 @end display
3289 @noindent
3290 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3291 nature.
3292 @ifset SOM
3293 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3294 symbol-relative instead.)
3295 @end ifset
3296
3297 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3298 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3299
3300 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3301 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3302 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3303 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3304 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3305 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3306 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3307 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3308 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3309
3310 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3311 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3312 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3313 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3314 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3315 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3316 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3317
3318 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3319 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3320 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3321 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3322 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3323 data and bss sections.
3324
3325 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3326 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3327
3328 @node Ld Sections
3329 @section Linker Sections
3330 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3331
3332 @table @strong
3333
3334 @ifset COFF-ELF
3335 @cindex named sections
3336 @cindex sections, named
3337 @item named sections
3338 @end ifset
3339 @ifset aout-bout
3340 @cindex text section
3341 @cindex data section
3342 @itemx text section
3343 @itemx data section
3344 @end ifset
3345 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3346 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3347 true of another.
3348 @c @ifset aout-bout
3349 When the program is running, however, it is
3350 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3351 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3352 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3353 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3354 in the data section.
3355 @c @end ifset
3356
3357 @cindex bss section
3358 @item bss section
3359 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3360 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3361 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3362 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3363 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3364 those explicit zeros from object files.
3365
3366 @cindex absolute section
3367 @item absolute section
3368 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3369 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3370 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3371 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3372
3373 @cindex undefined section
3374 @item undefined section
3375 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3376 the preceding sections.
3377 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3378 @end table
3379
3380 @cindex relocation example
3381 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3382 @ifset COFF-ELF
3383 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3384 @end ifset
3385 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3386
3387 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3388 @ifnottex
3389 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3390 @smallexample
3391 +-----+----+--+
3392 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3393 +-----+----+--+
3394
3395 text data bss
3396 seg. seg. seg.
3397
3398 +---+---+---+
3399 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3400 +---+---+---+
3401
3402 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3403 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3404 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3405
3406 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3407 @end smallexample
3408 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3409 @end ifnottex
3410 @need 5000
3411 @tex
3412 \bigskip
3413 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3414 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3415 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3416
3417 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3418 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3419 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3420
3421 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3422 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3423 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3424 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3425 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3426
3427 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3428 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3429
3430 @end tex
3431 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3432
3433 @node As Sections
3434 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3435
3436 @cindex internal assembler sections
3437 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3438 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3439 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3440 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3441 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3442 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3443 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3444 section-relative address.
3445
3446 @table @b
3447 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3448 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3449 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3450 bug in the assembler.
3451
3452 @cindex expr (internal section)
3453 @item expr section
3454 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3455 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3456 it in the expr section.
3457 @c FIXME item debug
3458 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3459 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3460 @c FIXME item register
3461 @end table
3462
3463 @node Sub-Sections
3464 @section Sub-Sections
3465
3466 @cindex numbered subsections
3467 @cindex grouping data
3468 @ifset aout-bout
3469 Assembled bytes
3470 @ifset COFF-ELF
3471 conventionally
3472 @end ifset
3473 fall into two sections: text and data.
3474 @end ifset
3475 You may have separate groups of
3476 @ifset GENERIC
3477 data in named sections
3478 @end ifset
3479 @ifclear GENERIC
3480 @ifclear aout-bout
3481 data in named sections
3482 @end ifclear
3483 @ifset aout-bout
3484 text or data
3485 @end ifset
3486 @end ifclear
3487 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3488 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3489 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3490 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3491 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3492 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3493 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3494 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3495 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3496 constants being output.
3497
3498 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3499 goes in subsection number zero.
3500
3501 @ifset GENERIC
3502 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3503 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3504 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3505 @end ifset
3506 @ifclear GENERIC
3507 @ifset H8
3508 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3509 boundary (two bytes).
3510 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3511 @end ifset
3512 @ifset I960
3513 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3514 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3515 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3516 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3517 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3518 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3519 @end ifset
3520 @end ifclear
3521
3522 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3523 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3524 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3525 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3526 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3527 data subsections as a data section.
3528
3529 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3530 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3531 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3532 @ifset COFF
3533 @ifset GENERIC
3534 When generating COFF output, you
3535 @end ifset
3536 @ifclear GENERIC
3537 You
3538 @end ifclear
3539 can also use an extra subsection
3540 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3541 @var{expression}}.
3542 @end ifset
3543 @ifset ELF
3544 @ifset GENERIC
3545 When generating ELF output, you
3546 @end ifset
3547 @ifclear GENERIC
3548 You
3549 @end ifclear
3550 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3551 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3552 @end ifset
3553 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3554 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3555 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3556 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3557 @smallexample
3558 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3559 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3560 .text 1
3561 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3562 .data 0
3563 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3564 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3565 .text 0
3566 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3567 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3568 @end smallexample
3569
3570 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3571 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3572 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3573 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3574 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3575 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3576 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3577
3578 @node bss
3579 @section bss Section
3580
3581 @cindex bss section
3582 @cindex common variable storage
3583 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3584 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3585 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3586 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3587 section are zeroed bytes.
3588
3589 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3590 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3591
3592 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3593 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3594
3595 @ifset GENERIC
3596 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3597 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3598 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3599 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3600 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3601 @end ifset
3602
3603 @node Symbols
3604 @chapter Symbols
3605
3606 @cindex symbols
3607 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3608 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3609 to debug.
3610
3611 @quotation
3612 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3613 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3614 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3615 @end quotation
3616
3617 @menu
3618 * Labels:: Labels
3619 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3620 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3621 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3622 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3623 @end menu
3624
3625 @node Labels
3626 @section Labels
3627
3628 @cindex labels
3629 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3630 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3631 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3632 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3633 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3634 definitions.
3635
3636 @ifset HPPA
3637 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3638 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3639 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3640 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3641 @end ifset
3642
3643 @node Setting Symbols
3644 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3645
3646 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3647 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3648 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3649 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3650 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3651 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3652 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3653 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3654
3655 @ifset Blackfin
3656 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3657 @end ifset
3658
3659 @node Symbol Names
3660 @section Symbol Names
3661
3662 @cindex symbol names
3663 @cindex names, symbol
3664 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3665 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3666 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3667 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3668 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3669 particular target machine), and underscores.
3670 @end ifclear
3671 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3672 @ifset H8
3673 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3674 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3675 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3676 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3677 @end ifset
3678 @end ifset
3679
3680 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3681 than @code{Foo}.
3682
3683 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3684 Local Labels. See below.
3685
3686 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3687 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3688 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3689 currently supported.
3690
3691 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3692 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3693 in a program.
3694
3695 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3696
3697 @cindex local symbol names
3698 @cindex symbol names, local
3699 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3700 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3701 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3702 set of local label prefixes.
3703 @ifset HPPA
3704 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3705 @end ifset
3706
3707 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3708 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3709 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3710 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3711
3712 @subheading Local Labels
3713
3714 @cindex local labels
3715 @cindex temporary symbol names
3716 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3717 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3718 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3719 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3720 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3721 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3722 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3723 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3724 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3725 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3726
3727 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3728 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3729 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3730 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3731 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3732 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3733 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3734
3735 Here is an example:
3736
3737 @smallexample
3738 1: branch 1f
3739 2: branch 1b
3740 1: branch 2f
3741 2: branch 1b
3742 @end smallexample
3743
3744 Which is the equivalent of:
3745
3746 @smallexample
3747 label_1: branch label_3
3748 label_2: branch label_1
3749 label_3: branch label_4
3750 label_4: branch label_3
3751 @end smallexample
3752
3753 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3754 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3755 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3756 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3757 these parts:
3758
3759 @table @code
3760 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3761 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3762 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3763 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3764 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3765 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3766 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3767 you may use them in debugging.
3768
3769 @item @var{number}
3770 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3771 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3772
3773 @item @kbd{C-B}
3774 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3775 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3776
3777 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3778 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3779 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3780 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3781 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3782 @end table
3783
3784 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3785 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3786
3787 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3788 @cindex dollar local symbols
3789
3790 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3791 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3792 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3793 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3794 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3795 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3796
3797 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3798 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3799 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3800
3801 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3802 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3803 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3804 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3805
3806 @node Dot
3807 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3808
3809 @cindex dot (symbol)
3810 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3811 @cindex current address
3812 @cindex location counter
3813 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3814 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3815 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3816 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3817 directive.
3818 @ifclear no-space-dir
3819 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3820 @samp{.space 4}.
3821 @end ifclear
3822
3823 @node Symbol Attributes
3824 @section Symbol Attributes
3825
3826 @cindex symbol attributes
3827 @cindex attributes, symbol
3828 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3829 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3830 attributes.
3831 @ifset INTERNALS
3832 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3833 @end ifset
3834
3835 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3836 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3837 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3838 would want.
3839
3840 @menu
3841 * Symbol Value:: Value
3842 * Symbol Type:: Type
3843 @ifset aout-bout
3844 @ifset GENERIC
3845 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3846 @end ifset
3847 @ifclear GENERIC
3848 @ifclear BOUT
3849 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3850 @end ifclear
3851 @ifset BOUT
3852 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3853 @end ifset
3854 @end ifclear
3855 @end ifset
3856 @ifset COFF
3857 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3858 @end ifset
3859 @ifset SOM
3860 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3861 @end ifset
3862 @end menu
3863
3864 @node Symbol Value
3865 @subsection Value
3866
3867 @cindex value of a symbol
3868 @cindex symbol value
3869 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3870 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3871 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3872 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3873 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3874 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3875 called absolute.
3876
3877 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3878 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3879 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3880 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3881 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3882 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3883 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3884 allocated storage.
3885
3886 @node Symbol Type
3887 @subsection Type
3888
3889 @cindex type of a symbol
3890 @cindex symbol type
3891 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3892 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3893 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3894 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3895
3896 @ifset aout-bout
3897 @ifclear GENERIC
3898 @ifset BOUT
3899 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3900 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3901 @need 1000
3902 @node a.out Symbols
3903 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3904
3905 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3906 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3907 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3908 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3909 @code{b.out}.
3910
3911 @end ifset
3912 @ifclear BOUT
3913 @node a.out Symbols
3914 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3915
3916 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3917 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3918
3919 @end ifclear
3920 @end ifclear
3921 @ifset GENERIC
3922 @node a.out Symbols
3923 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3924
3925 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3926 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3927
3928 @end ifset
3929 @menu
3930 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3931 * Symbol Other:: Other
3932 @end menu
3933
3934 @node Symbol Desc
3935 @subsubsection Descriptor
3936
3937 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3938 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3939 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3940 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3941 @command{@value{AS}}.
3942
3943 @node Symbol Other
3944 @subsubsection Other
3945
3946 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3947 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3948 @end ifset
3949
3950 @ifset COFF
3951 @node COFF Symbols
3952 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3953
3954 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3955 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3956
3957 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3958 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3959 @code{.endef} directives.
3960
3961 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3962
3963 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3964 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3965 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3966
3967 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3968
3969 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3970 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3971 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3972 table information for COFF.
3973 @end ifset
3974
3975 @ifset SOM
3976 @node SOM Symbols
3977 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3978
3979 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3980 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3981
3982 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3983 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3984
3985 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3986 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3987 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3988 @end ifset
3989
3990 @node Expressions
3991 @chapter Expressions
3992
3993 @cindex expressions
3994 @cindex addresses
3995 @cindex numeric values
3996 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3997 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3998
3999 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4000 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4001 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4002 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4003 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4004 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4005
4006 @menu
4007 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4008 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4009 @end menu
4010
4011 @node Empty Exprs
4012 @section Empty Expressions
4013
4014 @cindex empty expressions
4015 @cindex expressions, empty
4016 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4017 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4018 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4019 is compatible with other assemblers.
4020
4021 @node Integer Exprs
4022 @section Integer Expressions
4023
4024 @cindex integer expressions
4025 @cindex expressions, integer
4026 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4027 by @emph{operators}.
4028
4029 @menu
4030 * Arguments:: Arguments
4031 * Operators:: Operators
4032 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4033 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4034 @end menu
4035
4036 @node Arguments
4037 @subsection Arguments
4038
4039 @cindex expression arguments
4040 @cindex arguments in expressions
4041 @cindex operands in expressions
4042 @cindex arithmetic operands
4043 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4044 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4045 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4046 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4047 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4048 instruction operands.
4049
4050 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4051 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4052 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4053 integer.
4054
4055 Numbers are usually integers.
4056
4057 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4058 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4059 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4060 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4061 assemblers.
4062
4063 @cindex subexpressions
4064 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4065 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4066 operator followed by an argument.
4067
4068 @node Operators
4069 @subsection Operators
4070
4071 @cindex operators, in expressions
4072 @cindex arithmetic functions
4073 @cindex functions, in expressions
4074 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4075 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4076 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4077 whitespace.
4078
4079 @node Prefix Ops
4080 @subsection Prefix Operator
4081
4082 @cindex prefix operators
4083 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4084 one argument, which must be absolute.
4085
4086 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4087 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4088 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4089 @tex
4090 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4091 @end tex
4092
4093 @table @code
4094 @item -
4095 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4096 @item ~
4097 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4098 @end table
4099
4100 @tex
4101 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4102 @end tex
4103
4104 @node Infix Ops
4105 @subsection Infix Operators
4106
4107 @cindex infix operators
4108 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4109 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4110 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4111 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4112 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4113
4114 @enumerate
4115 @cindex operator precedence
4116 @cindex precedence of operators
4117
4118 @item
4119 Highest Precedence
4120
4121 @table @code
4122 @item *
4123 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4124
4125 @item /
4126 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4127
4128 @item %
4129 @dfn{Remainder}.
4130
4131 @item <<
4132 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4133
4134 @item >>
4135 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4136 @end table
4137
4138 @item
4139 Intermediate precedence
4140
4141 @table @code
4142 @item |
4143
4144 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4145
4146 @item &
4147 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4148
4149 @item ^
4150 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4151
4152 @item !
4153 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4154 @end table
4155
4156 @item
4157 Low Precedence
4158
4159 @table @code
4160 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4161 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4162 @cindex arguments for addition
4163 @item +
4164 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4165 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4166 sections.
4167
4168 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4169 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4170 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4171 @item -
4172 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4173 result has the section of the left argument.
4174 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4175 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4176 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4177
4178 @cindex comparison expressions
4179 @cindex expressions, comparison
4180 @item ==
4181 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4182 @item <>
4183 @itemx !=
4184 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4185 @item <
4186 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4187 @item >
4188 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4189 @item >=
4190 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4191 @item <=
4192 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4193
4194 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4195 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4196 perform signed comparisons.
4197 @end table
4198
4199 @item Lowest Precedence
4200
4201 @table @code
4202 @item &&
4203 @dfn{Logical And}.
4204
4205 @item ||
4206 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4207
4208 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4209 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4210 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4211 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4212
4213 @end table
4214 @end enumerate
4215
4216 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4217 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4218
4219 @node Pseudo Ops
4220 @chapter Assembler Directives
4221
4222 @cindex directives, machine independent
4223 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4224 @cindex machine independent directives
4225 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4226 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4227 in lower case.
4228
4229 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4230 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4231 @ifset GENERIC
4232 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4233 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4234 @end ifset
4235 @ifclear GENERIC
4236 @ifset machine-directives
4237 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4238 @end ifset
4239 @end ifclear
4240
4241 @menu
4242 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4243 @ifset COFF
4244 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4245 @end ifset
4246
4247 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4248 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4249 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4250 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4251 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4252 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4253 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4254 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4255 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4256 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4257 @ifset COFF
4258 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4259 @end ifset
4260 @ifset aout-bout
4261 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4262 @end ifset
4263 @ifset COFF
4264 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4265 @end ifset
4266
4267 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4268 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4269 * Else:: @code{.else}
4270 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4271 * End:: @code{.end}
4272 @ifset COFF
4273 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4274 @end ifset
4275
4276 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4277 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4278 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4279 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4280 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4281 * Err:: @code{.err}
4282 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4283 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4284 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4285 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4286 * File:: @code{.file}
4287 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4288 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4289 * Func:: @code{.func}
4290 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4291 @ifset ELF
4292 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4293 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4294 @end ifset
4295
4296 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4297 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4298 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4299 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4300 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4301 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4302 @ifset ELF
4303 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4304 @end ifset
4305
4306 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4307 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4308 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4309 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4310 @ifclear no-line-dir
4311 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4312 @end ifclear
4313
4314 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4315 * List:: @code{.list}
4316 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4317 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4318 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4319 @ifset ELF
4320 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4321 @end ifset
4322
4323 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4324 @ignore
4325 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4326 @end ignore
4327
4328 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4329 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4330 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4331 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4332 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4333 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4334 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4335 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4336 @ifset ELF
4337 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4338 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4339 @end ifset
4340
4341 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4342 @ifset ELF
4343 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4344 @end ifset
4345
4346 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4347 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4348 @ifset ELF
4349 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4350 @end ifset
4351
4352 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4353 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4354 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4355 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4356 @ifset COFF
4357 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4358 @end ifset
4359 @ifset COFF-ELF
4360 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4361 @end ifset
4362
4363 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4364 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4365 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4366 @ifset COFF-ELF
4367 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4368 @end ifset
4369 @ifclear no-space-dir
4370 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4371 @end ifclear
4372
4373 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4374 @ifclear no-space-dir
4375 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4376 @end ifclear
4377 @ifset have-stabs
4378 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4379 @end ifset
4380
4381 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4382 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4383 @ifset ELF
4384 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4385 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4386 @end ifset
4387
4388 @ifset COFF
4389 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4390 @end ifset
4391
4392 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4393 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4394 @ifset COFF-ELF
4395 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4396 @end ifset
4397
4398 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4399 @ifset COFF
4400 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4401 @end ifset
4402
4403 @ifset ELF
4404 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4405 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4406 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4407 @end ifset
4408
4409 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4410 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4411 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4412 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4413 @ifclear no-space-dir
4414 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4415 @end ifclear
4416 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4417 @end menu
4418
4419 @node Abort
4420 @section @code{.abort}
4421
4422 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4423 @cindex stopping the assembly
4424 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4425 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4426 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4427 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4428 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4429
4430 @ifset COFF
4431 @node ABORT (COFF)
4432 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4433
4434 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4435 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4436 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4437
4438 @ifset BOUT
4439 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4440 but ignores it.
4441 @end ifset
4442 @end ifset
4443
4444 @node Align
4445 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4446
4447 @cindex padding the location counter
4448 @cindex @code{align} directive
4449 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4450 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4451 required, as described below.
4452
4453 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4454 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4455 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4456 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4457 with no-op instructions.
4458
4459 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4460 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4461 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4462 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4463 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4464 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4465 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4466
4467 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4468 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4469 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4470 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4471 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4472 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4473 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4474
4475 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4476 strongarm, it is the
4477 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4478 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4479 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4480 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4481
4482 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4483 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4484 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4485 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4486 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4487
4488 @node Altmacro
4489 @section @code{.altmacro}
4490 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4491
4492 @ftable @code
4493 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4494 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4495 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4496 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4497 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4498 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4499 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4500
4501 @item String delimiters
4502 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4503 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4504
4505 @table @code
4506 @item '@var{string}'
4507 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4508
4509 @item <@var{string}>
4510 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4511 @end table
4512
4513 @item single-character string escape
4514 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4515 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4516 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4517 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4518
4519 @item Expression results as strings
4520 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4521 and use the result as a string.
4522 @end ftable
4523
4524 @node Ascii
4525 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4526
4527 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4528 @cindex string literals
4529 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4530 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4531 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4532
4533 @node Asciz
4534 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4535
4536 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4537 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4538 @cindex null-terminated strings
4539 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4540 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4541
4542 @node Balign
4543 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4544
4545 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4546 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4547 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4548 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4549 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4550 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4551 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4552
4553 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4554 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4555 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4556 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4557 with no-op instructions.
4558
4559 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4560 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4561 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4562 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4563 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4564 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4565 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4566
4567 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4568 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4569 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4570 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4571 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4572 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4573 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4574 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4575 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4576 undefined.
4577
4578 @node Bundle directives
4579 @section Bundle directives
4580 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4581 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4582 @cindex bundle
4583 @cindex instruction bundle
4584 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4585 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4586 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4587 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4588 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4589 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4590 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4591
4592 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4593 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4594 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4595 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4596 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4597 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4598 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4599 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4600 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4601 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4602 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4603
4604 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4605 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4606 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4607 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4608 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4609 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4610 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4611 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4612 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4613
4614 @cindex bundle-locked
4615 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4616 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4617 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4618 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4619 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4620 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4621 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4622 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4623 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4624 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4625 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4626 bundle size.
4627
4628 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4629 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4630 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4631 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4632 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4633 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4634
4635 @node Byte
4636 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4637
4638 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4639 @cindex integers, one byte
4640 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4641 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4642
4643 @node CFI directives
4644 @section CFI directives
4645 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4646 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4647 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4648 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4649 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4650 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4651 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4652 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4653
4654 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4655 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4656
4657 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4658 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4659 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4660 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4661 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4662 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4663
4664 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4665 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4666
4667 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4668 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4669 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4670 unwind entry previously opened by
4671 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4672
4673 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4674 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4675 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4676 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4677 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4678 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4679 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4680 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4681 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4682 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4683 no personality routine.
4684
4685 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4686 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4687 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4688 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4689 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4690 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4691
4692 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4693 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4694 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4695 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4696 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4697 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4698 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4699 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4700
4701 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4702 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4703 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4704 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4705 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4706 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4707 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4708
4709 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4710 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4711 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4712 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4713 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4714 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4715
4716 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4717 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4718 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4719 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4720 by a section directive.
4721
4722 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4723 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4724 @code{.p2align} directive.
4725
4726 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4727 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4728 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4729
4730 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4731 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4732 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4733 remains the same.
4734
4735 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4736 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4737 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4738 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4739 CFA address.
4740
4741 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4742 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4743 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4744
4745 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4746 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4747 CFA.
4748
4749 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4750 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4751 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4752 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4753 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4754 code it's annotating.
4755
4756 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4757 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4758
4759 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4760 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4761 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4762 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4763
4764 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4765 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4766
4767 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4768 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4769 i.e. no restoration needed.
4770
4771 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4772 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4773 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4774 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4775 the previous saved state.
4776
4777 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4778 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4779 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4780
4781 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4782 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4783
4784 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4785 SPARC register window has been saved.
4786
4787 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4788 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4789 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4790 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4791
4792 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4793 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4794 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4795 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4796
4797 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4798 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4799 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4800 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4801 or another register.
4802
4803 @node Comm
4804 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4805
4806 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4807 @cindex symbol, common
4808 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4809 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4810 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4811 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4812 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4813 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4814 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4815 using the largest size.
4816
4817 @ifset COFF-ELF
4818 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4819 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4820 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4821 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4822 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4823 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4824 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4825 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4826 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4827 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4828 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4829 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4830 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4831 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4832 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4833 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4834 @end ifset
4835
4836 @ifset HPPA
4837 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4838 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4839 @end ifset
4840
4841 @node Data
4842 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4843
4844 @cindex @code{data} directive
4845 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4846 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4847 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4848 to zero.
4849
4850 @ifset COFF
4851 @node Def
4852 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4853
4854 @cindex @code{def} directive
4855 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4856 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4857 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4858 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4859 @ifset BOUT
4860
4861 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4862 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4863 but ignored.
4864 @end ifset
4865 @end ifset
4866
4867 @ifset aout-bout
4868 @node Desc
4869 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4870
4871 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4872 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4873 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4874 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4875 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4876
4877 @ifset COFF
4878 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4879 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4880 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4881 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4882 @end ifset
4883 @end ifset
4884
4885 @ifset COFF
4886 @node Dim
4887 @section @code{.dim}
4888
4889 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4890 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4891 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4892 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4893 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4894 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4895 @ifset BOUT
4896
4897 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4898 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4899 ignores it.
4900 @end ifset
4901 @end ifset
4902
4903 @node Double
4904 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4905
4906 @cindex @code{double} directive
4907 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4908 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4909 assembles floating point numbers.
4910 @ifset GENERIC
4911 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4912 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4913 @end ifset
4914 @ifclear GENERIC
4915 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4916 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4917 in @sc{ieee} format.
4918 @end ifset
4919 @end ifclear
4920
4921 @node Eject
4922 @section @code{.eject}
4923
4924 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4925 @cindex new page, in listings
4926 @cindex page, in listings
4927 @cindex listing control: new page
4928 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4929
4930 @node Else
4931 @section @code{.else}
4932
4933 @cindex @code{else} directive
4934 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4935 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4936 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4937 was false.
4938
4939 @node Elseif
4940 @section @code{.elseif}
4941
4942 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4943 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4944 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4945 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4946
4947 @node End
4948 @section @code{.end}
4949
4950 @cindex @code{end} directive
4951 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4952 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4953
4954 @ifset COFF
4955 @node Endef
4956 @section @code{.endef}
4957
4958 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4959 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4960 @code{.def}.
4961 @ifset BOUT
4962
4963 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4964 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4965 directive but ignores it.
4966 @end ifset
4967 @end ifset
4968
4969 @node Endfunc
4970 @section @code{.endfunc}
4971 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4972 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4973
4974 @node Endif
4975 @section @code{.endif}
4976
4977 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4978 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4979 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4980 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4981
4982 @node Equ
4983 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4984
4985 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4986 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4987 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4988 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4989 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4990
4991 @ifset HPPA
4992 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4993 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4994 @end ifset
4995
4996 @ifset Z80
4997 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4998 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4999 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5000 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5001 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5002 @end ifset
5003
5004 @node Equiv
5005 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5006 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5007 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5008 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5009 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5010 undefined.
5011
5012 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5013 @smallexample
5014 .ifdef SYM
5015 .err
5016 .endif
5017 .equ SYM,VAL
5018 @end smallexample
5019 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5020
5021 @node Eqv
5022 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5023 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5024 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5025 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5026 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5027 value is taken.
5028
5029 @node Err
5030 @section @code{.err}
5031 @cindex @code{err} directive
5032 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5033 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5034 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5035
5036 @node Error
5037 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5038 @cindex error directive
5039
5040 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5041 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5042 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5043 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5044
5045 @smallexample
5046 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5047 @end smallexample
5048
5049 @node Exitm
5050 @section @code{.exitm}
5051 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5052
5053 @node Extern
5054 @section @code{.extern}
5055
5056 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5057 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5058 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5059 all undefined symbols as external.
5060
5061 @node Fail
5062 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5063
5064 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5065 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5066 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5067 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5068 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5069 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5070
5071 @node File
5072 @section @code{.file}
5073 @cindex @code{file} directive
5074
5075 @ifclear no-file-dir
5076 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5077 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5078 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5079
5080 @subheading Default Version
5081
5082 @cindex logical file name
5083 @cindex file name, logical
5084 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5085 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5086
5087 @smallexample
5088 .file @var{string}
5089 @end smallexample
5090
5091 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5092 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5093 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5094 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5095 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5096
5097 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5098 @end ifclear
5099
5100 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5101 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5102
5103 @smallexample
5104 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5105 @end smallexample
5106
5107 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5108 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5109 literal.
5110
5111 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5112 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5113 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5114 entries will have.
5115
5116 @node Fill
5117 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5118
5119 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5120 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5121 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5122 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5123 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5124 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5125 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5126 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5127 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5128 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5129 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5130 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5131 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5132 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5133
5134 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5135 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5136 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5137 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5138
5139 @node Float
5140 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5141
5142 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5143 @cindex @code{float} directive
5144 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5145 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5146 @ifset GENERIC
5147 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5148 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5149 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5150 @end ifset
5151 @ifclear GENERIC
5152 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5153 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5154 in @sc{ieee} format.
5155 @end ifset
5156 @end ifclear
5157
5158 @node Func
5159 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5160 @cindex @code{func} directive
5161 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5162 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5163 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5164 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5165 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5166 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5167 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5168 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5169
5170 @node Global
5171 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5172
5173 @cindex @code{global} directive
5174 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5175 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5176 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5177 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5178 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5179 from another file linked into the same program.
5180
5181 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5182 compatibility with other assemblers.
5183
5184 @ifset HPPA
5185 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5186 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5187 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5188 @end ifset
5189
5190 @ifset ELF
5191 @node Gnu_attribute
5192 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5193 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5194
5195 @node Hidden
5196 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5197
5198 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5199 @cindex visibility
5200 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5201 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5202 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5203
5204 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5205 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5206 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5207 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5208 @end ifset
5209
5210 @node hword
5211 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5212
5213 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5214 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5215 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5216 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5217 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5218 a 16 bit number for each.
5219
5220 @ifset GENERIC
5221 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5222 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5223 @end ifset
5224 @ifclear GENERIC
5225 @ifset W32
5226 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5227 @end ifset
5228 @ifset W16
5229 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5230 @end ifset
5231 @end ifclear
5232
5233 @node Ident
5234 @section @code{.ident}
5235
5236 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5237
5238 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5239 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5240 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5241 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5242 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5243 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5244 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5245
5246 @node If
5247 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5248
5249 @cindex conditional assembly
5250 @cindex @code{if} directive
5251 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5252 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5253 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5254 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5255 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5256 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5257 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5258 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5259
5260 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5261 @table @code
5262 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5263 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5264 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5265 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5266 is considered to be undefined.
5267
5268 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5269 @item .ifb @var{text}
5270 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5271
5272 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5273 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5274 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5275 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5276 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5277 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5278 string comparison is case sensitive.
5279
5280 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5281 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5282 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5283
5284 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5285 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5286 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5287
5288 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5289 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5290 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5291 equal to zero.
5292
5293 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5294 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5295 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5296
5297 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5298 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5299 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5300 to zero.
5301
5302 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5303 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5304 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5305
5306 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5307 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5308 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5309 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5310
5311 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5312 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5313 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5314 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5315
5316 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5317 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5318 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5319 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5320 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5321 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5322 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5323
5324 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5325 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5326 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5327 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5328
5329 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5330 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5331 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5332 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5333 @end table
5334
5335 @node Incbin
5336 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5337
5338 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5339 @cindex binary files, including
5340 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5341 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5342 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5343 around @var{file}.
5344
5345 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5346 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5347 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5348 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5349 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5350
5351 @node Include
5352 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5353
5354 @cindex @code{include} directive
5355 @cindex supporting files, including
5356 @cindex files, including
5357 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5358 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5359 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5360 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5361 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5362 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5363 around @var{file}.
5364
5365 @node Int
5366 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5367
5368 @cindex @code{int} directive
5369 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5370 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5371 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5372 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5373 of target the assembly is for.
5374
5375 @ifclear GENERIC
5376 @ifset H8
5377 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5378 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5379 32-bit integers.
5380 @end ifset
5381 @end ifclear
5382
5383 @ifset ELF
5384 @node Internal
5385 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5386
5387 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5388 @cindex visibility
5389 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5390 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5391 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5392
5393 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5394 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5395 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5396 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5397 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5398 @end ifset
5399
5400 @node Irp
5401 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5402
5403 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5404 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5405 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5406 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5407 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5408 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5409 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5410 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5411
5412 For example, assembling
5413
5414 @example
5415 .irp param,1,2,3
5416 move d\param,sp@@-
5417 .endr
5418 @end example
5419
5420 is equivalent to assembling
5421
5422 @example
5423 move d1,sp@@-
5424 move d2,sp@@-
5425 move d3,sp@@-
5426 @end example
5427
5428 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5429
5430 @node Irpc
5431 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5432
5433 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5434 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5435 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5436 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5437 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5438 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5439 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5440 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5441
5442 For example, assembling
5443
5444 @example
5445 .irpc param,123
5446 move d\param,sp@@-
5447 .endr
5448 @end example
5449
5450 is equivalent to assembling
5451
5452 @example
5453 move d1,sp@@-
5454 move d2,sp@@-
5455 move d3,sp@@-
5456 @end example
5457
5458 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5459 at @xref{Macro}.
5460
5461 @node Lcomm
5462 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5463
5464 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5465 @cindex local common symbols
5466 @cindex symbols, local common
5467 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5468 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5469 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5470 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5471 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5472 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5473
5474 @ifset GENERIC
5475 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5476 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5477 @end ifset
5478
5479 @ifset HPPA
5480 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5481 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5482 @end ifset
5483
5484 @node Lflags
5485 @section @code{.lflags}
5486
5487 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5488 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5489 assemblers, but ignores it.
5490
5491 @ifclear no-line-dir
5492 @node Line
5493 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5494
5495 @cindex @code{line} directive
5496 @cindex logical line number
5497 @ifset aout-bout
5498 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5499 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5500 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5501 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5502 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5503 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5504 @end ifset
5505
5506 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5507 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5508 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5509 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5510 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5511
5512 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5513 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5514 debugging.
5515 @end ifclear
5516
5517 @node Linkonce
5518 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5519 @cindex COMDAT
5520 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5521 @cindex common sections
5522 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5523 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5524 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5525 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5526 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5527 unique.
5528
5529 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5530 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5531 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5532
5533 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5534 following strings. For example:
5535 @smallexample
5536 .linkonce same_size
5537 @end smallexample
5538 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5539
5540 @table @code
5541 @item discard
5542 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5543
5544 @item one_only
5545 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5546
5547 @item same_size
5548 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5549
5550 @item same_contents
5551 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5552 @end table
5553
5554 @node List
5555 @section @code{.list}
5556
5557 @cindex @code{list} directive
5558 @cindex listing control, turning on
5559 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5560 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5561 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5562 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5563 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5564
5565 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5566 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5567 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5568
5569 @node Ln
5570 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5571
5572 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5573 @ifclear no-line-dir
5574 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5575 @end ifclear
5576 @ifset no-line-dir
5577 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5578 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5579 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5580 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5581 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5582 @ifset BOUT
5583
5584 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5585 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5586 output format.
5587 @end ifset
5588 @end ifset
5589
5590 @node Loc
5591 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5592 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5593 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5594 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5595 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5596 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5597 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5598 the row is added.
5599
5600 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5601
5602 @table @code
5603 @item basic_block
5604 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5605 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5606
5607 @item prologue_end
5608 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5609 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5610
5611 @item epilogue_begin
5612 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5613 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5614
5615 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5616 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5617 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5618 either 0 or 1.
5619
5620 @item isa @var{value}
5621 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5622 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5623
5624 @item discriminator @var{value}
5625 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5626 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5627
5628 @end table
5629
5630 @node Loc_mark_labels
5631 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5632 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5633 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5634 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5635 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5636 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5637 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5638 this function respectively.
5639
5640 @ifset ELF
5641 @node Local
5642 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5643
5644 @cindex @code{local} directive
5645 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5646 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5647 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5648 they will be created.
5649
5650 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5651 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5652 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5653 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5654 @end ifset
5655
5656 @node Long
5657 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5658
5659 @cindex @code{long} directive
5660 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5661
5662 @ignore
5663 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5664 @c what it really ought to do
5665 @node Lsym
5666 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5667
5668 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5669 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5670 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5671 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5672 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5673 the same as the expression value:
5674 @smallexample
5675 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5676 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5677 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5678 @end smallexample
5679 @noindent
5680 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5681 @end ignore
5682
5683 @node Macro
5684 @section @code{.macro}
5685
5686 @cindex macros
5687 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5688 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5689 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5690
5691 @example
5692 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5693 .long \from
5694 .if \to-\from
5695 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5696 .endif
5697 .endm
5698 @end example
5699
5700 @noindent
5701 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5702
5703 @example
5704 .long 0
5705 .long 1
5706 .long 2
5707 .long 3
5708 .long 4
5709 .long 5
5710 @end example
5711
5712 @ftable @code
5713 @item .macro @var{macname}
5714 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5715 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5716 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5717 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5718 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5719 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5720 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5721 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5722 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5723 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5724 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5725 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5726
5727 @table @code
5728 @item .macro comm
5729 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5730 arguments.
5731
5732 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5733 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5734 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5735 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5736 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5737
5738 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5739 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5740 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5741 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5742 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5743 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5744 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5745 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5746
5747 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5748 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5749 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5750 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5751 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5752
5753 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5754 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5755 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5756
5757 @end table
5758
5759 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5760 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5761 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5762 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5763 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5764 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5765 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5766 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5767 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5768 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5769 this macro definition:
5770
5771 @example
5772 .macro label l
5773 \l:
5774 .endm
5775 @end example
5776
5777 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5778 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5779 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5780 identifier.
5781
5782 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5783 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5784 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5785 length specifier like this:
5786
5787 @example
5788 .macro opcode base length
5789 \base.\length
5790 .endm
5791 @end example
5792
5793 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5794 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5795 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5796
5797 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5798
5799 @table @code
5800 @item Insert white space
5801 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5802 solution. eg:
5803
5804 @example
5805 .macro label l
5806 \l :
5807 .endm
5808 @end example
5809
5810 @item Use @samp{\()}
5811 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5812 the following text. eg:
5813
5814 @example
5815 .macro opcode base length
5816 \base\().\length
5817 .endm
5818 @end example
5819
5820 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5821 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5822 used as a separator. eg:
5823
5824 @example
5825 .altmacro
5826 .macro label l
5827 l&:
5828 .endm
5829 @end example
5830 @end table
5831
5832 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5833 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5834 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5835
5836 @item .endm
5837 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5838 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5839
5840 @item .exitm
5841 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5842 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5843
5844 @cindex number of macros executed
5845 @cindex macros, count executed
5846 @item \@@
5847 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5848 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5849 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5850
5851 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5852 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5853 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5854 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5855 @end ftable
5856
5857 @node MRI
5858 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5859
5860 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5861 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5862 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5863 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5864 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5865 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5866
5867 @node Noaltmacro
5868 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5869 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5870
5871 @node Nolist
5872 @section @code{.nolist}
5873
5874 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5875 @cindex listing control, turning off
5876 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5877 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5878 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5879 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5880 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5881
5882 @node Octa
5883 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5884
5885 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5886 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5887 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5888 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5889 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5890 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5891
5892 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5893 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5894
5895 @node Offset
5896 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5897
5898 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5899 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5900 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5901 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5902 directive.
5903
5904 @node Org
5905 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5906
5907 @cindex @code{org} directive
5908 @cindex location counter, advancing
5909 @cindex advancing location counter
5910 @cindex current address, advancing
5911 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5912 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5913 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5914 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5915 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5916 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5917 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5918 is the same as the current subsection.
5919
5920 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5921 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5922 backwards.
5923
5924 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5925 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5926 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5927 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5928 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5929 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5930
5931 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5932 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5933 people's assemblers.
5934
5935 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5936 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5937 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5938 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5939
5940 @node P2align
5941 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5942
5943 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5944 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5945 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5946 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5947 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5948 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5949 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5950 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5951
5952 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5953 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5954 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5955 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5956 with no-op instructions.
5957
5958 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5959 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5960 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5961 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5962 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5963 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5964 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5965
5966 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5967 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5968 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5969 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5970 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5971 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5972 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5973 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5974 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5975 undefined.
5976
5977 @ifset ELF
5978 @node PopSection
5979 @section @code{.popsection}
5980
5981 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5982 @cindex Section Stack
5983 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5984 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5985 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5986 (@pxref{Previous}).
5987
5988 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5989 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5990 stack.
5991 @end ifset
5992
5993 @ifset ELF
5994 @node Previous
5995 @section @code{.previous}
5996
5997 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5998 @cindex Section Stack
5999 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6000 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6001 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6002 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6003
6004 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6005 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6006 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6007 subsections). For example:
6008
6009 @smallexample
6010 .section A
6011 .subsection 1
6012 .word 0x1234
6013 .subsection 2
6014 .word 0x5678
6015 .previous
6016 .word 0x9abc
6017 @end smallexample
6018
6019 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6020 section A. Whilst:
6021
6022 @smallexample
6023 .section A
6024 .subsection 1
6025 # Now in section A subsection 1
6026 .word 0x1234
6027 .section B
6028 .subsection 0
6029 # Now in section B subsection 0
6030 .word 0x5678
6031 .subsection 1
6032 # Now in section B subsection 1
6033 .word 0x9abc
6034 .previous
6035 # Now in section B subsection 0
6036 .word 0xdef0
6037 @end smallexample
6038
6039 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6040 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6041
6042 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6043 the top section on the section stack.
6044 @end ifset
6045
6046 @node Print
6047 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6048
6049 @cindex @code{print} directive
6050 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6051 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6052
6053 @ifset ELF
6054 @node Protected
6055 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6056
6057 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6058 @cindex visibility
6059 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6060 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6061
6062 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6063 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6064 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6065 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6066 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6067 this.
6068 @end ifset
6069
6070 @node Psize
6071 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6072
6073 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6074 @cindex listing control: paper size
6075 @cindex paper size, for listings
6076 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6077 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6078
6079 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6080 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6081 default width is 200 columns.
6082
6083 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6084 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6085 @code{.eject}).
6086
6087 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6088 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6089
6090 @node Purgem
6091 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6092
6093 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6094 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6095 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6096
6097 @ifset ELF
6098 @node PushSection
6099 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6100
6101 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6102 @cindex Section Stack
6103 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6104 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6105 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6106 (@pxref{Previous}).
6107
6108 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6109 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6110 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6111 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6112 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6113 @end ifset
6114
6115 @node Quad
6116 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6117
6118 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6119 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6120 each bignum, it emits
6121 @ifclear bignum-16
6122 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6123 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6124 @cindex eight-byte integer
6125 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6126
6127 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6128 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6129 @end ifclear
6130 @ifset bignum-16
6131 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6132 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6133 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6134 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6135 @end ifset
6136
6137 @node Reloc
6138 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6139
6140 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6141 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6142 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6143 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6144 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6145 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6146 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6147 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6148 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6149 section.
6150
6151 @node Rept
6152 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6153
6154 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6155 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6156 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6157
6158 For example, assembling
6159
6160 @example
6161 .rept 3
6162 .long 0
6163 .endr
6164 @end example
6165
6166 is equivalent to assembling
6167
6168 @example
6169 .long 0
6170 .long 0
6171 .long 0
6172 @end example
6173
6174 @node Sbttl
6175 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6176
6177 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6178 @cindex subtitles for listings
6179 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6180 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6181 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6182
6183 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6184 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6185
6186 @ifset COFF
6187 @node Scl
6188 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6189
6190 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6191 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6192 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6193 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6194 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6195 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6196 symbolic debugging information.
6197 @ifset BOUT
6198
6199 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6200 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6201 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6202 @end ifset
6203 @end ifset
6204
6205 @ifset COFF-ELF
6206 @node Section
6207 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6208
6209 @cindex named section
6210 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6211 named @var{name}.
6212
6213 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6214 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6215 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6216
6217 @ifset COFF
6218 @ifset ELF
6219 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6220 @subheading COFF Version
6221 @end ifset
6222
6223 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6224 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6225 ways:
6226
6227 @smallexample
6228 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6229 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6230 @end smallexample
6231
6232 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6233 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6234 @table @code
6235 @item b
6236 bss section (uninitialized data)
6237 @item n
6238 section is not loaded
6239 @item w
6240 writable section
6241 @item d
6242 data section
6243 @item e
6244 exclude section from linking
6245 @item r
6246 read-only section
6247 @item x
6248 executable section
6249 @item s
6250 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6251 @item a
6252 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6253 @item y
6254 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6255 @item 0-9
6256 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6257 @end table
6258
6259 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6260 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6261 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6262 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6263 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6264
6265 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6266 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6267 @end ifset
6268
6269 @ifset ELF
6270 @ifset COFF
6271 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6272 @subheading ELF Version
6273 @end ifset
6274
6275 @cindex Section Stack
6276 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6277 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6278 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6279 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6280
6281 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6282 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6283
6284 @smallexample
6285 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6286 @end smallexample
6287
6288 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6289 @kindex --sectname-subst
6290 @cindex section name substitution
6291 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6292 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6293 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6294
6295 @smallexample
6296 .macro exception_code
6297 .section %S.exception
6298 [exception code here]
6299 .previous
6300 .endm
6301
6302 .text
6303 [code]
6304 exception_code
6305 [...]
6306
6307 .section .init
6308 [init code]
6309 exception_code
6310 [...]
6311 @end smallexample
6312
6313 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6314 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6315 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6316 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6317 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6318 macros just for that purpose.
6319
6320 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6321 combination of the following characters:
6322 @table @code
6323 @item a
6324 section is allocatable
6325 @item e
6326 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6327 @item w
6328 section is writable
6329 @item x
6330 section is executable
6331 @item M
6332 section is mergeable
6333 @item S
6334 section contains zero terminated strings
6335 @item G
6336 section is a member of a section group
6337 @item T
6338 section is used for thread-local-storage
6339 @item ?
6340 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6341 @end table
6342
6343 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6344 @table @code
6345 @item @@progbits
6346 section contains data
6347 @item @@nobits
6348 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6349 @item @@note
6350 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6351 @item @@init_array
6352 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6353 @item @@fini_array
6354 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6355 @item @@preinit_array
6356 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6357 @end table
6358
6359 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6360
6361 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6362 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6363 @code{%} character.
6364
6365 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6366 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6367
6368 @smallexample
6369 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6370 @end smallexample
6371
6372 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6373 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6374 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6375 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6376 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6377 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6378 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6379 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6380 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6381
6382 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6383 be present along with an additional field like this:
6384
6385 @smallexample
6386 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6387 @end smallexample
6388
6389 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6390 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6391 @table @code
6392 @item comdat
6393 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6394 @item .gnu.linkonce
6395 an alias for comdat
6396 @end table
6397
6398 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6399 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6400
6401 @smallexample
6402 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6403 @end smallexample
6404
6405 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6406 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6407 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6408 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6409 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6410 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6411
6412 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6413 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6414 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6415 executable. The section will contain data.
6416
6417 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6418 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6419
6420 @smallexample
6421 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6422 @end smallexample
6423
6424 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6425 separated flags:
6426 @table @code
6427 @item #alloc
6428 section is allocatable
6429 @item #write
6430 section is writable
6431 @item #execinstr
6432 section is executable
6433 @item #exclude
6434 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6435 @item #tls
6436 section is used for thread local storage
6437 @end table
6438
6439 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6440 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6441 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6442 work.
6443 @end ifset
6444 @end ifset
6445
6446 @node Set
6447 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6448
6449 @cindex @code{set} directive
6450 @cindex symbol value, setting
6451 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6452 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6453 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6454 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6455
6456 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6457 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6458 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6459 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6460 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6461 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6462 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6463 different symbols.
6464
6465 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6466 file is the last value stored into it.
6467
6468 @ifset Z80
6469 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6470 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6471 @end ifset
6472
6473 @node Short
6474 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6475
6476 @cindex @code{short} directive
6477 @ifset GENERIC
6478 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6479 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6480
6481 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6482 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6483 @end ifset
6484 @ifclear GENERIC
6485 @ifset W16
6486 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6487 @end ifset
6488 @ifset W32
6489 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6490 a 16 bit number for each.
6491 @end ifset
6492 @end ifclear
6493
6494 @node Single
6495 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6496
6497 @cindex @code{single} directive
6498 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6499 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6500 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6501 @ifset GENERIC
6502 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6503 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6504 @end ifset
6505 @ifclear GENERIC
6506 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6507 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6508 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6509 @end ifset
6510 @end ifclear
6511
6512 @ifset COFF-ELF
6513 @node Size
6514 @section @code{.size}
6515
6516 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6517
6518 @ifset COFF
6519 @ifset ELF
6520 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6521 @subheading COFF Version
6522 @end ifset
6523
6524 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6525 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6526 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6527
6528 @smallexample
6529 .size @var{expression}
6530 @end smallexample
6531
6532 @ifset BOUT
6533 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6534 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6535 ignores it.
6536 @end ifset
6537 @end ifset
6538
6539 @ifset ELF
6540 @ifset COFF
6541 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6542 @subheading ELF Version
6543 @end ifset
6544
6545 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6546 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6547
6548 @smallexample
6549 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6550 @end smallexample
6551
6552 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6553 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6554 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6555 symbols.
6556 @end ifset
6557 @end ifset
6558
6559 @ifclear no-space-dir
6560 @node Skip
6561 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6562
6563 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6564 @cindex filling memory
6565 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6566 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6567 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6568 @samp{.space}.
6569 @end ifclear
6570
6571 @node Sleb128
6572 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6573
6574 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6575 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6576 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6577 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6578
6579 @ifclear no-space-dir
6580 @node Space
6581 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6582
6583 @cindex @code{space} directive
6584 @cindex filling memory
6585 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6586 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6587 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6588 as @samp{.skip}.
6589
6590 @ifset HPPA
6591 @quotation
6592 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6593 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6594 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6595 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6596 for a summary.
6597 @end quotation
6598 @end ifset
6599 @end ifclear
6600
6601 @ifset have-stabs
6602 @node Stab
6603 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6604
6605 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6606 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6607 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6608 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6609 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6610 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6611 Up to five fields are required:
6612
6613 @table @var
6614 @item string
6615 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6616 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6617 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6618 using this field.
6619
6620 @item type
6621 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6622 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6623 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6624
6625 @item other
6626 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6627 low 8 bits of this expression.
6628
6629 @item desc
6630 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6631 bits of this expression.
6632
6633 @item value
6634 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6635 @end table
6636
6637 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6638 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6639 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6640 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6641
6642 @table @code
6643 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6644 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6645
6646 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6647 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6648 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6649 strings.
6650
6651 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6652 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6653 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6654 assembled.
6655
6656 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6657 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6658 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6659
6660 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6661 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6662 All five fields are specified.
6663 @end table
6664 @end ifset
6665 @c end have-stabs
6666
6667 @node String
6668 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6669 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6670
6671 @cindex string, copying to object file
6672 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6673 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6674 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6675 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6676 @cindex @code{string} directive
6677 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6678 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6679 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6680 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6681
6682 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6683 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6684 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6685 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6686
6687 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6688 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6689 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6690 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6691
6692 Example:
6693 @smallexample
6694 .string32 "BYE"
6695 expands to:
6696 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6697 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6698 @end smallexample
6699
6700
6701 @node Struct
6702 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6703
6704 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6705 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6706 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6707 @smallexample
6708 .struct 0
6709 field1:
6710 .struct field1 + 4
6711 field2:
6712 .struct field2 + 4
6713 field3:
6714 @end smallexample
6715 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6716 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6717 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6718 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6719 before further assembly.
6720
6721 @ifset ELF
6722 @node SubSection
6723 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6724
6725 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6726 @cindex Section Stack
6727 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6728 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6729 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6730 (@pxref{Previous}).
6731
6732 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6733 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6734 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6735 @end ifset
6736
6737 @ifset ELF
6738 @node Symver
6739 @section @code{.symver}
6740 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6741 @cindex symbol versioning
6742 @cindex versions of symbols
6743 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6744 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6745 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6746 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6747 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6748 shared library.
6749
6750 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6751 @smallexample
6752 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6753 @end smallexample
6754 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6755 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6756 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6757 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6758 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6759 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6760 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6761 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6762 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6763 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6764 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6765 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6766 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6767 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6768
6769 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6770 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6771 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6772 symbol table.
6773
6774 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6775 @smallexample
6776 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6777 @end smallexample
6778 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6779 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6780 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6781 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6782
6783 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6784 @smallexample
6785 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6786 @end smallexample
6787 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6788 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6789 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6790 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6791 @end ifset
6792
6793 @ifset COFF
6794 @node Tag
6795 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6796
6797 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6798 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6799 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6800 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6801 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6802 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6803 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6804 @ifset BOUT
6805
6806 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6807 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6808 ignores it.
6809 @end ifset
6810 @end ifset
6811
6812 @node Text
6813 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6814
6815 @cindex @code{text} directive
6816 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6817 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6818 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6819 is used.
6820
6821 @node Title
6822 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6823
6824 @cindex @code{title} directive
6825 @cindex listing control: title line
6826 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6827 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6828
6829 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6830 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6831
6832 @ifset COFF-ELF
6833 @node Type
6834 @section @code{.type}
6835
6836 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6837
6838 @ifset COFF
6839 @ifset ELF
6840 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6841 @subheading COFF Version
6842 @end ifset
6843
6844 @cindex COFF symbol type
6845 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6846 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6847 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6848 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6849
6850 @smallexample
6851 .type @var{int}
6852 @end smallexample
6853
6854 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6855 entry.
6856
6857 @ifset BOUT
6858 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6859 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6860 directive but ignores it.
6861 @end ifset
6862 @end ifset
6863
6864 @ifset ELF
6865 @ifset COFF
6866 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6867 @subheading ELF Version
6868 @end ifset
6869
6870 @cindex ELF symbol type
6871 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6872 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6873 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6874
6875 @smallexample
6876 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6877 @end smallexample
6878
6879 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6880 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6881 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6882 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6883
6884 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6885 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6886 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6887 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6888 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6889 assemblers.
6890
6891 The syntaxes supported are:
6892
6893 @smallexample
6894 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6895 .type <name>,#<type>
6896 .type <name>,@@<type>
6897 .type <name>,%<type>
6898 .type <name>,"<type>"
6899 @end smallexample
6900
6901 The types supported are:
6902
6903 @table @gcctabopt
6904 @item STT_FUNC
6905 @itemx function
6906 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6907
6908 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6909 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6910 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6911 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6912
6913 @item STT_OBJECT
6914 @itemx object
6915 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6916
6917 @item STT_TLS
6918 @itemx tls_object
6919 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6920
6921 @item STT_COMMON
6922 @itemx common
6923 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6924
6925 @item STT_NOTYPE
6926 @itemx notype
6927 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6928
6929 @item gnu_unique_object
6930 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6931 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6932 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6933 systems).
6934
6935 @end table
6936
6937 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6938
6939 @end ifset
6940 @end ifset
6941
6942 @node Uleb128
6943 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6944
6945 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6946 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6947 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6948 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6949
6950 @ifset COFF
6951 @node Val
6952 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6953
6954 @cindex @code{val} directive
6955 @cindex COFF value attribute
6956 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6957 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6958 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6959 entry.
6960 @ifset BOUT
6961
6962 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6963 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6964 @end ifset
6965 @end ifset
6966
6967 @ifset ELF
6968 @node Version
6969 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6970
6971 @cindex @code{version} directive
6972 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6973 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6974 @end ifset
6975
6976 @ifset ELF
6977 @node VTableEntry
6978 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6979
6980 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6981 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6982 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6983
6984 @node VTableInherit
6985 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6986
6987 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6988 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6989 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6990 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6991 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6992 @end ifset
6993
6994 @node Warning
6995 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6996 @cindex warning directive
6997 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6998 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6999
7000 @node Weak
7001 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7002
7003 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7004 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7005 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7006
7007 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7008 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7009 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7010
7011 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7012 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7013 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7014
7015 @node Weakref
7016 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7017
7018 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7019 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7020 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7021 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7022 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7023 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7024
7025 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7026 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7027 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7028 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7029 had the references to the alias removed.
7030
7031 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7032 within the assembler.
7033
7034 @node Word
7035 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7036
7037 @cindex @code{word} directive
7038 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7039 separated by commas.
7040 @ifclear GENERIC
7041 @ifset W32
7042 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7043 @end ifset
7044 @ifset W16
7045 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7046 @end ifset
7047 @end ifclear
7048 @ifset GENERIC
7049
7050 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7051 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7052 @end ifset
7053
7054 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7055 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7056 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7057 @cindex difference tables altered
7058 @cindex altered difference tables
7059 @quotation
7060 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7061 @end quotation
7062
7063 @ifset GENERIC
7064 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7065 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7066 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7067 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7068
7069 @end ifset
7070 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7071 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7072 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7073 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7074 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7075 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7076 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7077 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7078 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7079 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7080 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7081 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7082 @code{sym2}.
7083
7084 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7085 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7086 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7087 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7088 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7089 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7090 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7091
7092 @ifset INTERNALS
7093 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7094 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7095 assembly language programmers.
7096 @end ifset
7097 @end ifset
7098 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7099
7100 @ifclear no-space-dir
7101 @node Zero
7102 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7103
7104 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7105 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7106 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7107 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7108 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7109 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7110 @end ifclear
7111
7112 @node Deprecated
7113 @section Deprecated Directives
7114
7115 @cindex deprecated directives
7116 @cindex obsolescent directives
7117 One day these directives won't work.
7118 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7119 @table @t
7120 @item .abort
7121 @item .line
7122 @end table
7123
7124 @ifset ELF
7125 @node Object Attributes
7126 @chapter Object Attributes
7127 @cindex object attributes
7128
7129 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7130 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7131 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7132 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7133 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7134 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7135 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7136 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7137 newer generation at run-time.
7138
7139 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7140 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7141 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7142 correctly.
7143
7144 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7145 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7146 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7147 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7148 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7149 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7150
7151 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7152 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7153
7154 @menu
7155 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7156 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7157 @end menu
7158
7159 @node GNU Object Attributes
7160 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7161
7162 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7163 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7164
7165 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7166 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7167 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7168 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7169 architecture-dependent ones.
7170
7171 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7172
7173 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7174
7175 @table @r
7176 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7177 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7178 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7179 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7180 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7181 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7182 @end table
7183
7184 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7185
7186 @table @r
7187 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7188 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7189
7190 @itemize @bullet
7191 @item
7192 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7193 @item
7194 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7195 double-precision FPU.
7196 @item
7197 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7198 @item
7199 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7200 @item
7201 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7202 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7203 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7204 @item
7205 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7206 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7207 general-purpose registers.
7208 @item
7209 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7210 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7211 @item
7212 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7213 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7214 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7215 @end itemize
7216 @end table
7217
7218 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7219
7220 @table @r
7221 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7222 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7223
7224 @itemize @bullet
7225 @item
7226 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7227 @item
7228 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7229 @item
7230 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7231 @item
7232 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7233 @end itemize
7234
7235 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7236 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7237
7238 @itemize @bullet
7239 @item
7240 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7241 @item
7242 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7243 @item
7244 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7245 @item
7246 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7247 @end itemize
7248 @end table
7249
7250 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7251
7252 @table @r
7253 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7254 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7255
7256 @itemize @bullet
7257 @item
7258 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7259 @item
7260 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7261 @item
7262 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7263 @end itemize
7264 @end table
7265
7266 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7267 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7268
7269 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7270 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7271 mailing list.
7272
7273 @itemize @bullet
7274 @item
7275 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7276 @item
7277 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7278 @item
7279 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7280 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7281 @item
7282 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7283 @item
7284 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7285 @item
7286 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7287 @end itemize
7288
7289 @end ifset
7290
7291 @ifset GENERIC
7292 @node Machine Dependencies
7293 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7294
7295 @cindex machine dependencies
7296 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7297 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7298 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7299 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7300 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7301 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7302 optimization.
7303
7304 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7305 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7306 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7307
7308 @menu
7309 @ifset AARCH64
7310 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7311 @end ifset
7312 @ifset ALPHA
7313 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7314 @end ifset
7315 @ifset ARC
7316 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7317 @end ifset
7318 @ifset ARM
7319 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7320 @end ifset
7321 @ifset AVR
7322 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7323 @end ifset
7324 @ifset Blackfin
7325 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7326 @end ifset
7327 @ifset CR16
7328 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7329 @end ifset
7330 @ifset CRIS
7331 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7332 @end ifset
7333 @ifset D10V
7334 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7335 @end ifset
7336 @ifset D30V
7337 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7338 @end ifset
7339 @ifset EPIPHANY
7340 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7341 @end ifset
7342 @ifset H8/300
7343 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7344 @end ifset
7345 @ifset HPPA
7346 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7347 @end ifset
7348 @ifset I370
7349 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7350 @end ifset
7351 @ifset I80386
7352 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7353 @end ifset
7354 @ifset I860
7355 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7356 @end ifset
7357 @ifset I960
7358 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7359 @end ifset
7360 @ifset IA64
7361 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7362 @end ifset
7363 @ifset IP2K
7364 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7365 @end ifset
7366 @ifset LM32
7367 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7368 @end ifset
7369 @ifset M32C
7370 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7371 @end ifset
7372 @ifset M32R
7373 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7374 @end ifset
7375 @ifset M680X0
7376 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7377 @end ifset
7378 @ifset M68HC11
7379 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7380 @end ifset
7381 @ifset METAG
7382 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7383 @end ifset
7384 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7385 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7386 @end ifset
7387 @ifset MIPS
7388 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7389 @end ifset
7390 @ifset MMIX
7391 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7392 @end ifset
7393 @ifset MSP430
7394 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7395 @end ifset
7396 @ifset NDS32
7397 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7398 @end ifset
7399 @ifset NIOSII
7400 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7401 @end ifset
7402 @ifset NS32K
7403 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7404 @end ifset
7405 @ifset PDP11
7406 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7407 @end ifset
7408 @ifset PJ
7409 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7410 @end ifset
7411 @ifset PPC
7412 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7413 @end ifset
7414 @ifset RL78
7415 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7416 @end ifset
7417 @ifset RX
7418 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7419 @end ifset
7420 @ifset S390
7421 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7422 @end ifset
7423 @ifset SCORE
7424 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7425 @end ifset
7426 @ifset SH
7427 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7428 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7429 @end ifset
7430 @ifset SPARC
7431 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7432 @end ifset
7433 @ifset TIC54X
7434 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7435 @end ifset
7436 @ifset TIC6X
7437 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7438 @end ifset
7439 @ifset TILEGX
7440 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7441 @end ifset
7442 @ifset TILEPRO
7443 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7444 @end ifset
7445 @ifset V850
7446 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7447 @end ifset
7448 @ifset VAX
7449 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7450 @end ifset
7451 @ifset VISIUM
7452 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7453 @end ifset
7454 @ifset XGATE
7455 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7456 @end ifset
7457 @ifset XSTORMY16
7458 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7459 @end ifset
7460 @ifset XTENSA
7461 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7462 @end ifset
7463 @ifset Z80
7464 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7465 @end ifset
7466 @ifset Z8000
7467 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7468 @end ifset
7469 @end menu
7470
7471 @lowersections
7472 @end ifset
7473
7474 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7475 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7476 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7477 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7478 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7479 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7480 @c in both conditional blocks.
7481
7482 @ifset AARCH64
7483 @include c-aarch64.texi
7484 @end ifset
7485
7486 @ifset ALPHA
7487 @include c-alpha.texi
7488 @end ifset
7489
7490 @ifset ARC
7491 @include c-arc.texi
7492 @end ifset
7493
7494 @ifset ARM
7495 @include c-arm.texi
7496 @end ifset
7497
7498 @ifset AVR
7499 @include c-avr.texi
7500 @end ifset
7501
7502 @ifset Blackfin
7503 @include c-bfin.texi
7504 @end ifset
7505
7506 @ifset CR16
7507 @include c-cr16.texi
7508 @end ifset
7509
7510 @ifset CRIS
7511 @include c-cris.texi
7512 @end ifset
7513
7514 @ifset Renesas-all
7515 @ifclear GENERIC
7516 @node Machine Dependencies
7517 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7518
7519 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7520 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7521 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7522 family.
7523
7524 @menu
7525 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7526 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7527 @end menu
7528 @lowersections
7529 @end ifclear
7530 @end ifset
7531
7532 @ifset D10V
7533 @include c-d10v.texi
7534 @end ifset
7535
7536 @ifset D30V
7537 @include c-d30v.texi
7538 @end ifset
7539
7540 @ifset EPIPHANY
7541 @include c-epiphany.texi
7542 @end ifset
7543
7544 @ifset H8/300
7545 @include c-h8300.texi
7546 @end ifset
7547
7548 @ifset HPPA
7549 @include c-hppa.texi
7550 @end ifset
7551
7552 @ifset I370
7553 @include c-i370.texi
7554 @end ifset
7555
7556 @ifset I80386
7557 @include c-i386.texi
7558 @end ifset
7559
7560 @ifset I860
7561 @include c-i860.texi
7562 @end ifset
7563
7564 @ifset I960
7565 @include c-i960.texi
7566 @end ifset
7567
7568 @ifset IA64
7569 @include c-ia64.texi
7570 @end ifset
7571
7572 @ifset IP2K
7573 @include c-ip2k.texi
7574 @end ifset
7575
7576 @ifset LM32
7577 @include c-lm32.texi
7578 @end ifset
7579
7580 @ifset M32C
7581 @include c-m32c.texi
7582 @end ifset
7583
7584 @ifset M32R
7585 @include c-m32r.texi
7586 @end ifset
7587
7588 @ifset M680X0
7589 @include c-m68k.texi
7590 @end ifset
7591
7592 @ifset M68HC11
7593 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7594 @end ifset
7595
7596 @ifset METAG
7597 @include c-metag.texi
7598 @end ifset
7599
7600 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7601 @include c-microblaze.texi
7602 @end ifset
7603
7604 @ifset MIPS
7605 @include c-mips.texi
7606 @end ifset
7607
7608 @ifset MMIX
7609 @include c-mmix.texi
7610 @end ifset
7611
7612 @ifset MSP430
7613 @include c-msp430.texi
7614 @end ifset
7615
7616 @ifset NDS32
7617 @include c-nds32.texi
7618 @end ifset
7619
7620 @ifset NIOSII
7621 @include c-nios2.texi
7622 @end ifset
7623
7624 @ifset NS32K
7625 @include c-ns32k.texi
7626 @end ifset
7627
7628 @ifset PDP11
7629 @include c-pdp11.texi
7630 @end ifset
7631
7632 @ifset PJ
7633 @include c-pj.texi
7634 @end ifset
7635
7636 @ifset PPC
7637 @include c-ppc.texi
7638 @end ifset
7639
7640 @ifset RL78
7641 @include c-rl78.texi
7642 @end ifset
7643
7644 @ifset RX
7645 @include c-rx.texi
7646 @end ifset
7647
7648 @ifset S390
7649 @include c-s390.texi
7650 @end ifset
7651
7652 @ifset SCORE
7653 @include c-score.texi
7654 @end ifset
7655
7656 @ifset SH
7657 @include c-sh.texi
7658 @include c-sh64.texi
7659 @end ifset
7660
7661 @ifset SPARC
7662 @include c-sparc.texi
7663 @end ifset
7664
7665 @ifset TIC54X
7666 @include c-tic54x.texi
7667 @end ifset
7668
7669 @ifset TIC6X
7670 @include c-tic6x.texi
7671 @end ifset
7672
7673 @ifset TILEGX
7674 @include c-tilegx.texi
7675 @end ifset
7676
7677 @ifset TILEPRO
7678 @include c-tilepro.texi
7679 @end ifset
7680
7681 @ifset V850
7682 @include c-v850.texi
7683 @end ifset
7684
7685 @ifset VAX
7686 @include c-vax.texi
7687 @end ifset
7688
7689 @ifset VISIUM
7690 @include c-visium.texi
7691 @end ifset
7692
7693 @ifset XGATE
7694 @include c-xgate.texi
7695 @end ifset
7696
7697 @ifset XSTORMY16
7698 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7699 @end ifset
7700
7701 @ifset XTENSA
7702 @include c-xtensa.texi
7703 @end ifset
7704
7705 @ifset Z80
7706 @include c-z80.texi
7707 @end ifset
7708
7709 @ifset Z8000
7710 @include c-z8k.texi
7711 @end ifset
7712
7713 @ifset GENERIC
7714 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7715 @raisesections
7716 @end ifset
7717
7718 @node Reporting Bugs
7719 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7720 @cindex bugs in assembler
7721 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7722
7723 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7724
7725 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7726 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7727 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7728 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7729
7730 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7731 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7732
7733 @menu
7734 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7735 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7736 @end menu
7737
7738 @node Bug Criteria
7739 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7740 @cindex bug criteria
7741
7742 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7743
7744 @itemize @bullet
7745 @cindex fatal signal
7746 @cindex assembler crash
7747 @cindex crash of assembler
7748 @item
7749 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7750 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7751
7752 @cindex error on valid input
7753 @item
7754 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7755
7756 @cindex invalid input
7757 @item
7758 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7759 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7760 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7761
7762 @item
7763 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7764 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7765 @end itemize
7766
7767 @node Bug Reporting
7768 @section How to Report Bugs
7769 @cindex bug reports
7770 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7771
7772 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7773 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7774 contact that organization first.
7775
7776 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7777 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7778 distribution.
7779
7780 @ifset BUGURL
7781 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7782 to @value{BUGURL}.
7783 @end ifset
7784
7785 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7786 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7787 fact or leave it out, state it!
7788
7789 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7790 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7791 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7792 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7793 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7794 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7795 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7796 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7797 and the most helpful.
7798
7799 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7800 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7801 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7802
7803 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7804 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7805 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7806 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7807
7808 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7809
7810 @itemize @bullet
7811 @item
7812 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7813 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7814
7815 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7816 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7817
7818 @item
7819 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7820
7821 @item
7822 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7823 version number.
7824
7825 @item
7826 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7827 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7828
7829 @item
7830 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7831 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7832 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7833
7834 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7835 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7836
7837 @item
7838 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7839 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7840 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7841 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7842 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7843 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7844 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7845
7846 @item
7847 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7848 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7849
7850 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7851 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7852 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7853 make a mistake.
7854
7855 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7856 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7857 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7858 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7859 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7860 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7861 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7862 observations.
7863
7864 @item
7865 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7866 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7867 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7868 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7869 by line number.
7870
7871 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7872 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7873 @end itemize
7874
7875 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7876
7877 @itemize @bullet
7878 @item
7879 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7880
7881 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7882 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7883 changes will not affect it.
7884
7885 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7886 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7887 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7888 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7889
7890 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7891 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7892 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7893 less time, and so on.
7894
7895 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7896 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7897
7898 @item
7899 A patch for the bug.
7900
7901 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7902 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7903 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7904 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7905
7906 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7907 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7908 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7909 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7910
7911 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7912 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7913 help us to understand.
7914
7915 @item
7916 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7917
7918 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7919 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7920 @end itemize
7921
7922 @node Acknowledgements
7923 @chapter Acknowledgements
7924
7925 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7926 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7927 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7928 @c (October 2012),
7929 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7930
7931 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7932 more details?}
7933
7934 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7935 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7936 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7937
7938 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7939 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7940 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7941 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7942 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7943 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7944 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7945 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7946 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7947 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7948
7949 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7950 in format-specific I/O modules.
7951
7952 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7953 has done much work with it since.
7954
7955 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7956
7957 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7958
7959 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7960 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7961
7962 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7963 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7964 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7965 support a.out format.
7966
7967 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7968 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7969 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7970 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7971 targets.
7972
7973 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7974 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7975 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7976 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7977 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7978 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7979 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7980
7981 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7982 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7983 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7984 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7985
7986 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7987
7988 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7989
7990 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7991 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7992 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7993 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7994
7995 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7996 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7997 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7998 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7999 and some initial 64-bit support).
8000
8001 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8002
8003 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8004 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8005
8006 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8007 flavors.
8008
8009 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8010 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8011
8012 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8013 configuration enhancements.
8014
8015 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8016
8017 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8018 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8019 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8020 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8021
8022 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8023 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8024 @include fdl.texi
8025
8026 @node AS Index
8027 @unnumbered AS Index
8028
8029 @printindex cp
8030
8031 @bye
8032 @c Local Variables:
8033 @c fill-column: 79
8034 @c End:
This page took 0.291087 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.